JP6172138B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is known that includes a rotatable member formed to be rotatable and a detection unit that detects a rotational position of the rotatable member (Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-46467 A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that it is difficult to accurately detect the rotational position of the rotating member because the rotational position of the rotating member is detected based on the cumulative number of pulses.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can accurately detect the rotational position of a rotating member.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a movable member formed to be movable, and a detection means for detecting a movement position of the movable member, The moving member includes a plurality of detected parts at least partially arranged along the direction of movement of the moving member, and a plurality of detection sensors arranged on a movement locus of the detected part. The moving member includes a plurality of divided members, and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along a moving direction, and the detected portion is a part of the plurality of divided members. The plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on the arrangement interval of the division members, and are arranged on the division members and not on the remaining division members.

Gaming machine of claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein, Ru comprises a light emitting means.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the moving position of the moving member can be accurately detected.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of an upper raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of an upper raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of an upper raising / lowering unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of an upper raising / lowering unit. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of an upper raising / lowering unit. (A) is a front view of the first gear, (b) is a rear view of the first gear, (c) is a front view of the second gear, and (d) is a second gear. FIG. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission device. It is a front perspective view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a drive side slide member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a drive side slide member. It is a rear view of a drive side slide member. (A) is a front perspective view of a connection member, (b) is a front view of the connection member in the direction of arrow XXVIb in FIG. 26 (a), and (c) is an arrow in FIG. 26 (a). It is a rear view of the connection member in the XXVIc direction view. It is a rear view of a 2nd channel | path formation member and a connection member. It is a rear view of a 2nd channel | path formation member and a connection member. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. FIG. 30 is a side view of the liquid crystal lifting unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XXX in FIG. 29. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front perspective view of a game board and a left swing unit. It is a front perspective view of a left swing unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a left swing unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left swing unit. It is a front view of a rocking | fluctuation operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit. It is a front view of a rocking | fluctuation operation unit. It is a partial front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit and a left swing unit. It is a partial front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit and a left swing unit. It is a front view of a rotation unit. It is a front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a front view of a rotation unit in the state where a guide member was removed. It is a front perspective view of a rotation unit in the state where a guide member was removed. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a front view of a rotation unit in the state where a rotation member, a part of pitching device, and a guide member were removed. It is a front schematic diagram of a guide member. (A) is a front view of the one side rotation drive member and other side rotation member, (b) is sectional drawing of the one side rotation member and other side rotation member in the LIb-LIb line | wire of Fig.51 (a). is there. It is sectional drawing of the rotation unit cut | disconnected by the plane containing the rotating shaft of a center transmission member. It is a front view of a case member and a drive mechanism. (A) is a front view of a rotation member, (b) is a side view of the rotation member in the arrow LIVb direction view of FIG. 54 (a). It is a rear view of the rotation member in the arrow LV direction view of FIG.54 (b). (A) is a front perspective view of a division member, (b) is a back perspective view of a division member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a division member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a division member. (A) And (b) is the upper surface perspective view and lower surface perspective view of the division member in the state arrange | positioned in the 1st area. (A) And (b) is the upper surface perspective view and lower surface perspective view of the division member in the state arrange | positioned in a 2nd area. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a pitching device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a pitching device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an arm rotation mechanism. It is a front view of a pitching device in the state where an arm member of an arm rotation mechanism is arranged in a holding position. It is a front view of a pitching device in the state where an arm member of an arm rotation mechanism is arranged in a separation position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the holding piece protruding and retracting mechanism in a state where the holding piece is arranged at the protruding position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism in a state where the holding piece is disposed at the immersion position. (A) is a front perspective view of the holding piece protruding and retracting mechanism in a state in which the holding piece is arranged at the protruding position, and (b) is a partial enlarged view of the holding piece protruding and protruding mechanism taken along line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. It is sectional drawing. (A) is a front perspective view of the holding piece in / out mechanism in a state in which the holding piece is disposed at the immersion position, and (b) is a partial enlargement of the holding piece in / out mechanism in the line LXIXb-LXIXb in FIG. 69 (a). It is sectional drawing. It is a front perspective view of a guide member. It is a back perspective view of a guide member. It is a front view of a guide member and a rotation member. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member and the rotating member in the first section, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member and the rotating member in the second section. (A) to (d) is a state transition diagram every time the one-side rotation driving member is rotated 30 degrees. It is a state relationship figure which shows the relationship between the state of engagement or cancellation | release of the one side rotational drive member and other side rotational drive member with respect to a division member, and a phase. (A) to (c) is a state transition diagram for each unit rotation amount of the rotating member. It is the partial expanded side view which expanded the part in the 1st area of a rotating member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the left swing unit in the second embodiment. (A) is a front view of the main body member of the tip wall member, (b) is a top view of the main body member of the tip wall member, and (c) is a line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in FIG. 79 (b). It is sectional drawing of the main body member of a tip wall member, (d) is a front view of the main body member of a tip wall member. It is a front view of a left swing unit. It is a front view of a left swing unit. It is a front view of a left swing unit. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the left swing unit and the liquid crystal lifting unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal raising / lowering unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. (A) is a partial front view of the drive side slide member in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a side view of the drive side slide member in the arrow LXXXIXb direction view of Fig.89 (a), (c) These are the partial front views of a drive side slide member.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 88, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with the upper surface opened. . On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the front direction, and by sliding it in the back direction against the urging, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball pulling lever 54b is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and general prizes. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state display associated with the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the ball flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. It is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric combination 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric combination 640a is in a closed state (an overhanging state), and the ball is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “○” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (retracted). State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (retracted) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, resulting in a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state and to easily win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  A second variable winning device 82a is disposed at the upper left of the first winning port 64, and a second specific winning port 82 is provided in the vicinity thereof. Normally, the second variable winning device 82a is in a closed state (reduced state) so that the ball cannot enter the second specific winning port 82. On the other hand, when the second variable winning device is opened (in an expanded state) at the time of a specific jackpot (for example, 15R probability variable jackpot), the special gaming state where the ball is likely to win the second specific winning slot 82 is made. Can do.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64. The variable display device unit 80 may be on the left side.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, and the like) 227, and variable effects (variation Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 8 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200.

  6 and 7, the state where the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position is shown in FIG. 9. In FIG. 9, the second path forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 and the first path forming member of the left swinging unit 500. FIG. 10 illustrates a state in which the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 600 is disposed at the raised position. 6 to 10 show a state in which the upper elevating unit 300 is disposed at the raised position.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 10, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 210 formed in a box shape, and an upper elevating unit 300, a liquid crystal elevating unit 400, and a left swing unit are provided in the inner space of the rear case 210. 500, the rotation unit 600, and the light emitting decorative member 700 are accommodated.

  The back case 210 includes a bottom wall portion 211 having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 211 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side open. The bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210 is provided with a concave portion having a frontal substantially circular shape at the center thereof, and the rotating unit 600 is accommodated in the concave portion. The liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is disposed on the front side of the rotating unit 600, and the upper lifting / lowering unit 300, the left swing unit 500 and the decorative light emitting member 700 are the upper edge, left side edge and lower side edge of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400. It is arranged in each part.

  The upper lifting unit 300 includes a lifting body 330 in which a plurality (four in this embodiment) are juxtaposed in the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 8), and these lifting bodies 330 are independently in the height direction (FIG. 8). It is formed to be movable up and down (refer to FIGS. 12 and 13). In the state where the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position, when the lifting / lowering body 330 is disposed at the raised position, almost the entire surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized (see FIG. 8). When 330 is placed in the lowered position (see FIG. 12), a part of the third symbol display device 81 is made invisible by the elevating body 330.

  The liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is arranged in a vertical posture with its axis along the vertical direction and a pair of guide rods 451 arranged at a predetermined interval in the width direction, and both ends in the width direction of the guide rod 451 are arranged. A drive side slide member 420 and a driven side slide member 430 supported so as to be slidable are provided, and a drive motor 441 that drives the drive side slide member 420 to move up and down. The drive motor 441 drives the drive side slide member 420 up and down. As a result, the driven-side slide member 430 is moved up and down.

  That is, when the drive side slide member 420 is raised, the drive side slide member 420 pushes the driven side slide member 430 upward against the action of gravity, while the drive side slide member 420 is lowered. As the drive side slide member 420 is lowered, the driven side slide member 430 is lowered by its own weight.

  The drive side slide member 420 is provided with a second passage forming member 422, and the driven side slide member 430 is provided with a FIG. 3 side display device 81. When the drive-side slide member 420 is disposed at the connecting position between the raised position and the lowered position, the second passage forming member 422 can be connected to the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 (see FIG. 9). Further, when the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the raised position, the upper region of the third symbol display device 81 is disposed on the back side of the upper lift unit 300 (see FIG. 10).

  The left swing unit 500 includes a first passage forming member 520 that is swung in a direction in which the distal end side is moved up and down around the base end side. When the first passage forming member 520 is swung in the direction of lifting the tip end side, the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the connecting position (see FIG. 9), and the tip end side is connected to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400, When it is swung in the direction in which the tip side is swung down, it is disposed at the release position (see FIG. 10), and the connection with the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is released.

  The sphere flowing down the game area can flow into the left swing unit 500, and the left swing unit 500 flows in when the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 9). The ball is sent to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 via the first passage forming member 520, while the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position (see FIG. 10). Then, the ball that has flowed in is sent to the game area through a passage, which will be described later, provided separately from the first passage formation member 520.

  The rotation unit 600 is an effect device configured to simulate a roulette. In other words, a member (rotating member 640) corresponding to a wheel (rotary disk) formed to be rotatable, and the wheel is formed by dividing the wheel in the circumferential direction, and a red or black color is given and a different number is displayed. A portion corresponding to the pocket (display plate 646 and partition plate 647), and the ball B thrown from the device (throwing device 650) on the inner peripheral side of the wheel is a portion of the portion corresponding to the plurality of pockets It is formed to fall on either.

  In a state where the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position (see FIG. 8), almost the entire rotating unit 600 is shielded from being visible to the player by the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400, while the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is at the connected position. In the disposed state (see FIG. 9), a part of the member corresponding to the wheel (lower part) is exposed, and in the state in which the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is disposed in the raised position (see FIG. 10), In addition to a part (lower part) of the corresponding member, there is a path from the ball B held on the inner peripheral side of the member corresponding to the wheel to the part corresponding to the pocket after the ball B is thrown. These are exposed and are visible to the player.

  The light emitting decoration member 700 includes a case body formed of a light-transmitting material and a plurality of LEDs disposed in the case body, and a mode of light emitted from the LEDs (for example, an LED of a light emitting LED). By changing the number and the light emission time, an effect by light emission is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 20, detailed configurations of the upper elevating / lowering unit 300, the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 400, the left swing unit 500, the rotating unit 600 and the light emitting decorative member 700 will be described. First, the upper lift unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the upper lifting unit 300, and FIGS. 12 and 13 are front views of the upper lifting unit 300. 11 and 12 show a state in which all the lifting bodies 330 arranged in parallel in the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 12) are arranged at the raised position, and in FIG. 13, all the lifting bodies 330 are lowered. The state of being placed in position is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, the upper elevating unit 300 includes a plurality of elevating bodies 330 (four in the present embodiment) arranged in the width direction of the horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped base member 310, and each elevating body 330 is configured as follows. It is configured to be movable up and down between an ascending position (see FIG. 12) and a descending position (see FIG. 13). Next, with reference to FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, the configuration of the drive mechanism of each lifting body 330 will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a front exploded perspective view of the upper lift unit 300, and FIG. 15 is a rear exploded perspective view of the upper lift unit 300.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the upper elevating unit 300 includes a base member 310 having a horizontally long rectangular plate shape and a space for housing the transmission device 350 between the base member 310 and the base member 310. A back cover 320 fastened and fixed to the back side, a lifting body 330 in which a rack 332 is accommodated between the base member 310 and the back cover 320 and a circular effect portion 331 is disposed on the front side of the base member 310; A driving device 340 that is fastened and fixed to the back cover member 320 and generates a driving force necessary for the lifting operation of the lifting body, and a transmission device 350 that transmits the driving force generated by the driving device 340 to the lifting body 330 are mainly used. Prepare.

  The cover member 310 has a semicircular shape in which the center of a circle is disposed at the lower end and is recessed from the front side surface toward the back side. The cover member 310 includes a rack 332 of the elevator 330 from the back side surface. And a guide rib 312 protruding in a rib shape toward a position with a slight gap in the left-right direction.

  The semicircular recessed portion 311 is configured with a radius slightly larger than the outer diameter of the effect portion 331 of the elevating body 320, and the center of the circle of the semicircular recessed portion 311 and the center of the effect portion 331 are vertically linear. Are placed at the matching positions. Thereby, when the effect part 331 moves upward, it can be moved to a position just before the position where it interferes with the semicircular recessed part 311 on the front side of the base member 310, and the vertical width of the base member 310 is secured. In addition, it is possible to ensure a large ascending movement width of the effect section 331.

  The guide rib portion 312 is a rib-like portion extending in the vertical direction, and protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the left and right side surfaces of the rack 332 of the elevating body 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11). Thereby, it can suppress that the raising / lowering body 330 moves to the left-right direction during a raising / lowering movement (a parallel movement or inclination operation | movement).

  In addition, by configuring the semicircular recessed portion 311 as a recessed portion that is recessed from the front side to the back side, the area where the back side can be made invisible is widened as compared to a case where the space penetrates in the front-rear direction. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to secure a large area for disposing a mechanism portion (a portion such as a gear or a motor that is not intended to be visually recognized by the player).

  The back cover 320 includes a main body portion 321 configured in a case shape having an open front side and a lower side, a cylindrical shaft support portion 322 protruding from the main body portion 321 to the front side, and a front surface from the shaft support portion 322. A guide hole 323, which is a long hole drilled in a state in which the extending direction coincides with the vertical direction at a position displaced in the left-right direction, and a shaft support portion from the surrounding bottom portion where the upper shaft support portion 322 is projected. And a locking portion 324 formed in a rib shape along the radial direction of 322.

  The shaft support portion 322 is a portion that supports the pair of gear members 351 and 352 of the transmission device 350, and the guide hole 323 is a hole that guides the lifting operation of the lifting body 330.

  The locking portion 324 is disposed on the upper side in the vertical direction and the lower side in the vertical direction with respect to the axis of the upper shaft support portion 322, and in the state where the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position or the lowered position, respectively. The end portion of the locking arc portion 351c of the gear 351 is a portion that can be contacted in the rotation direction.

  The elevating body 330 includes an effect portion 331 configured in a circular plate shape, and a rack 332 that is fixed to the back surface of the effect portion 331 and extends in the vertical direction at a position spaced from the rear side surface of the effect portion 331. .

  The rendering unit 331 is a portion where a circular liquid crystal panel is disposed inside a circular outer frame, and a rendering is performed by displaying patterns and figures on the liquid crystal panel.

  The rack 332 includes a slide shaft 332 a that protrudes to the back side and protrudes to a position where the rack 332 is inserted into the guide hole 323 of the back cover 320.

  A plurality of slide shafts 332a are not provided in a projecting manner, but one is provided in a projecting manner. Therefore, since the number of guide holes 323 can be reduced to one (can be reduced), a large moving distance of the rack 332 can be secured while suppressing the space for arranging the guide holes 323 in the vertical direction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rack 332 can be brought into contact with the guide rib portion 312 in the left-right direction, the rack 332 can be moved in the left-right direction even if the rack 332 is connected to the guide hole 323 at one position. Can be prevented. Thereby, when the elevating body 330 moves up and down, the effect part 331 can be prevented from swinging in the left-right direction, and the gap between the second gear 352 and the rack 332 can be prevented from fluctuating and the meshing relationship can be prevented from deteriorating. be able to.

  The drive device 340 includes a drive motor 341 that is a drive source fastened and fixed to the back cover 320, and a drive gear 342 that is rotated by rotation of the drive shaft of the drive motor 341 and transmits a drive force to the transmission device 350. .

  The transmission device 350 is supported by the shaft support 322 and meshed with the drive gear 342, and is meshed with the first gear 351 and the rack 332 and supported by the shaft support 322. A second gear 352.

  As described above, the plurality (four in the present embodiment) of the lifting bodies 330 include the independent drive motors 341. Therefore, in addition to the operation in which all the lifting bodies 330 move up and down in conjunction, It can be moved up and down individually. In addition, since the technical idea of each raising / lowering body 330 is common, below, the raising / lowering body 330 arrange | positioned at the left end of FIG. 11 is demonstrated, and description about the other raising / lowering body 330 is abbreviate | omitted.

  Next, the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (a) is a front view of the first gear 351, FIG. 16 (b) is a rear view of the first gear 351, and FIG. 16 (c) is a front view of the second gear 352. FIG. 16D is a rear view of the second gear 352.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 (a) and 16 (b), the first gear 351 has a through hole through which the shaft support portion 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted, and a main body portion 351a in which gear teeth are formed on the outer peripheral surface. And an extension length of about half of the tooth height of the gear teeth on the outer peripheral surface of the main body 351a (the pitch circle C1 connecting the contact points of the teeth to be engaged) Abutment portion 351b that is formed to project radially in the overhang length), and a latch that protrudes in an arc shape centering on the axis along the direction parallel to the axis from the back side surface of main body portion 351a Arc portion 351c.

  The abutting portion 351b has an arc shape with a radius r centered on the central axis of the main body portion 351a, and a tooth thickness (arc) of about two to three gear teeth formed on the main body portion 351a. (The tooth thickness in the range of approximately 45 to 60 degrees). That is, since the formation length in the circumferential direction of the main body portion 351a is made longer than the tooth thickness of one gear tooth, the strength in the circumferential direction can be ensured as compared with the gear teeth of the main body portion 351a.

  The locking arc portion 351c is a portion whose circumferential tip can be brought into contact with the locking portion 324 (see FIG. 14) of the back cover 320 in the circumferential direction, and regulates the rotation angle of the first gear 351. There is a role.

  As shown in FIG. 16C and FIG. 16D, the second gear 352 is composed of two layers of gears having different tooth shapes on the front side and the back side, and an intermediate plate 353 configured in a donut plate shape. And a deformed gear portion 354 formed on the front side of the intermediate plate 353 and having a partially deformed tooth shape, and a spur gear shape formed on the back side of the intermediate plate 353 and meshed with a rack 332 (see FIG. 15). Transmission gear portion 355.

  The intermediate plate 352 is formed so as to protrude outward in the radial direction from the tips of the gear teeth of the deformed gear portion 354 and the transmission gear portion 355. Therefore, the mating member (the first gear 351 or the rack 332 (see FIG. 15)) can be brought into contact with each other by overlapping in the direction parallel to the tooth surface (see FIG. 17). It is possible to suppress movement in the direction parallel to the tooth surface during the elevating operation of 330.

  The deformed gear portion 354 is a portion engaged with the first gear 351 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11), has a through hole through which the shaft support portion 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted, and has gear teeth on the outer peripheral surface. A main body portion 354a to be formed, a receiving portion 354b that is formed to protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 354a where gear teeth are not formed, and one end of the receiving portion 354b (on the right side of FIG. 16C) And adjacent gear teeth 354c provided adjacent to the end portion).

  The receiving portion 354b is a counterclockwise front view from the adjacent gear teeth 354c along the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 354a (the side on which the first gear 351 is engaged with the adjacent gear portion 354c when the elevating body 330 is moved upward) ) At a disposition angle of about two gear teeth (about 30 to 50 degrees), and the tip surface of the contact portion 351b in a state where the transmission device 350 is supported by the shaft support portion 322. Of the adjacent gear teeth 354c between the curved wall portion 354b1 and the circumferential tooth surface of the adjacent gear teeth 354c. , And a connecting wall portion 354b2 formed at a pitch circle extending to a pitch circle C2 in which the contacts of the teeth to be engaged are connected. Therefore, the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c on the side of the connecting wall portion 354b2 is an overhang length that is about half the radial length of the side surface on the opposite side of the connecting wall portion 354b2 of the adjacent gear tooth 354c. In a state of being integrally formed with the connecting wall part 354b2, the connecting wall part 354b2 projects in the radial direction.

  As shown in FIG. 16C, in the state where the transmission device 350 is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 322, the second gear 352 is curved along the arc shape with the radius r formed by the tip surface of the contact portion 351b. When the portion 354b1 is disposed, the adjacent gear tooth 354c is disposed outside the arc having the radius r (on the second gear 352 side) (the adjacent gear tooth 354c has the radius r). The formation is made at a position that does not interfere with the circle).

  Next, the ascending / descending operation of the elevating body 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20. Since the ascending operation and the descending operation have the same operation path, the ascending operation will be described here, and the description of the descending operation will be omitted.

  17 to 20 are front views of the lifting body 330 and the transmission device 350 in which the lifting operation of the lifting body 330 is illustrated in time series. 17 illustrates a state in which the lifting body 330 is disposed at the lowered position. In FIG. 18, the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise from the state illustrated in FIG. The state where the distance rising operation is started and the end portion in the circumferential direction of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 begins to engage with the adjacent gear teeth 354c of the second gear 352 is illustrated, and in FIG. 19, the state illustrated in FIG. The state immediately after the first gear 351 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view and the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise in the front view and the contact between the circumferential end surface of the contact portion 351b and the adjacent gear teeth 354c is released. FIG. 20 shows a state in which only the first gear 351 is rotated by a predetermined amount clockwise from the state shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, the elevating body 330 is moved up and down when the driving force of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) is transmitted to the rack 332 via the drive gear 342 and the transmission device 350. The More specifically, the driving force of the drive gear 342 is transmitted from the first gear 351 meshed with the drive gear 342 to the deformed gear portion 354 of the second gear 352 meshed with the first gear 351, The rotation of the second gear 352 is transmitted to the rack meshed with the transmission gear portion 355 (see FIG. 16D) of the second gear 352, so that the lifting body 330 moves up and down.

  In the lowered position shown in FIG. 17, the slide shaft 322 a (see FIG. 15) of the rack 332 is disposed at the lower end of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15) of the back cover 320. Therefore, it is possible to mechanically prevent the rack 332 from moving further downward.

  In the state illustrated in FIG. 17, the first gear 351 is brought into contact with the circumferential end of the locking arc portion 351 c of the first gear 351 and the lower locking portion 324 of the back cover 320. Is rotated mechanically in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front (the direction in which the rack 332 is lowered).

  As a result, even if there is a load that causes the drive gear 342 to over-rotate due to poor control of the drive motor 341 and to rotate the first gear 351 further clockwise from the state shown in FIG. Since the rotation of the first gear 351 is mechanically prevented, the load can be prevented from being transmitted to the second gear 352, and the situation where the rack 332 is lowered can be avoided, so that the slide shaft 322a (see FIG. 15) is pressed against the lower surface of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15), and the slide shaft 322a or the guide hole 323 can be prevented from being damaged.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in the process in which the elevating body 330 moves upward, the circumferential end surface of the contact portion 351 b whose circumferential tooth thickness is larger than that of the other gear teeth meshes with the adjacent gear teeth 354 c. Therefore, a load transmitted in the reverse direction from the second gear 352 to the first gear 351 (a load due to the weight of the elevating body 330) can be received by the contact portion 351b having a higher strength than other gear teeth. The durability of the first gear 351 can be improved.

  Since the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 extends to the pitch circle C1 and the connecting wall portion 354b2 of the second gear 352 extends to the pitch circle C2, the contact portion 351b is connected in the state of FIG. It approaches to the position which rubs with wall part 354b2. Therefore, the contact portion 351b and the adjacent gear tooth 354c can be brought into contact with each other at a portion close to the base of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, and the durability of the adjacent gear tooth 354c can be improved.

  Further, since the adjacent gear tooth 354c is connected to the connecting wall portion 354b2 on one side surface in the circumferential direction, the strength against the load received from the circumferential direction is improved as compared with the other gear teeth. In other words, since the overhang length in the radial direction of the side surface on the side of the connecting wall portion 354b2 is shortened, resistance to deformation of the adjacent gear teeth 354c in the direction perpendicular to the tooth height direction increases, and the connecting wall portion Since the 354b2 is formed integrally with the adjacent gear teeth 354c, the total tooth thickness of the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the connecting wall portion 354b2 as a portion receiving the force applied to the adjacent gear teeth 354c is increased. The resistance against the circumferential deformation of the adjacent gear teeth 354c increases. Thereby, it can suppress that the adjacent gear tooth 354c breaks when receiving the contact part 351b of the 1st gear 351.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the arcuate tip of the abutting portion 351b and the adjacent gear teeth 354c abut in a state immediately after the elevating body 330 is disposed at the ascending position. In this state, since the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 are not in contact with each other in the circumferential direction of the first gear 351, transmission of the driving force in the rotational direction of the first gear 351 to the second gear 352 is released. The

  Therefore, the force that supports the weight of the lifting body 330 meshed with the second gear 352 is not transmitted from the first gear 351, and the lifting body 330 starts to move in the falling direction, so that the second gear 352 moves the rack 332 down. Rotate in the direction to move downward (counterclockwise in FIG. 19).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, since the contact portion 351b is disposed in the range in the direction in which the adjacent gear teeth 354c rotate (inside the circle formed by the tip of the adjacent gear teeth 354c), the second gear When rotating 352, it is necessary to push the contact portion 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear teeth 354c by the adjacent gear teeth 354c.

  Since the outer peripheral shape of the contact portion 351b is an arc shape centered on the central axis of the main body portion 351a, the load applied to the outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 351b is an axial component toward the axial side of the first gear 351. It is decomposed into Fa and a circumferential component Fb along the tangential direction of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351.

  The axial component Fa is not in a direction in which the first gear 351 can be rotated, and in a state where the rigidity of the first gear 351 is ensured (in a structure that does not expand and contract in the radial direction), the contact portion is caused by the axial component Fa. It is difficult to push 351b outside the movement locus of the adjacent gear teeth 354c.

  The circumferential component Fb is directed in the rotational direction of the first gear 351, but the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b are in contact with each other at a point, and therefore slip between the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b. Since the first gear 351 is difficult to rotate, it is difficult to push the contact portion 351b outside the movement locus of the adjacent gear teeth 354c by the circumferential component Fb.

  Accordingly, the adjacent gear tooth 354c prevents the contact portion 351b from being pushed outside the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, so that the second gear 352 is prevented from rotating, and the second gear 352 and The state of the elevating body 330 is maintained.

  The abutting portion 351b and the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b are both formed in an arc shape with a radius r centering on the first gear 351, and as shown in FIG. 19, the circumference of the first rotating gear 351 is Since the contact is made per surface along the direction, the rotation of the first gear 351 can be firmly received using the entire area of the curved wall portion 354b1. Thereby, even if the stop of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) is delayed after the elevating body 330 reaches the raised position, the first gear 351 can be prevented from over-rotating, and the drive motor 341 is stopped. Can be prevented from affecting the operation mode of the elevating body 330.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the first gear 351 rotates and stops until the locking arc portion 351c comes into contact with the upper locking portion 324. 18 to 20, the circumferential end surface of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 pushes the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, so that the second gear 352 is rotated. 354c is aligned with the second gear 352, and in the state shown in FIG. 20, a state in which the adjacent gear tooth 354c abuts against the tooth tip surface of the abutting portion 351b can be reliably formed.

  From the state shown in FIG. 19 to the state shown in FIG. 20, the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position, and therefore the second gear 352 is restricted from rotating in the direction in which the rack 332 is moved upward (clockwise in FIG. 20). Is done. Therefore, even if the first gear 351 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 19 with respect to the second gear 352, the second gear 352 does not rotate. Therefore, it is possible to reliably form a state in which the tooth tip surface of the contact portion 351b faces the adjacent gear tooth 354c.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the curved wall portion 354 b 1 has a curved wall portion 354 b 1 along the arc shape of the radius r formed by the tip surface of the contact portion 351 b in the state where the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position. Since the adjacent gear teeth 354c are arranged outside the circular arc having the radius r (on the second gear 352 side), only the first gear 351 is rotated in the same rotational direction (from the state shown in FIG. 19). It can be rotated in the counterclockwise direction of FIG.

  At this time, since the tooth thickness of the contact portion 351b is thicker than other gear teeth (approximately two to three gear teeth), the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 is moderately increased. can do. That is, for example, even if the first gear 351 stops at an intermediate phase from the state shown in FIG. 19 to the state shown in FIG. 20, the relationship between the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b is the same. The rotation of the second gear 352 can be restricted.

  Further, the rotation of the second gear 352 in both directions can be restricted while the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 is moderated. That is, even if the second gear 352 rotates clockwise in FIG. 20, the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b abuts against the tooth tip surface of the abutting portion 351b, so that the direction of the load is described in detail above. The rotation of the second gear 352 is restricted in the same manner as when the provided gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b are in contact. Therefore, since the rack 332 is restricted from moving in both the up and down directions in a state in which the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling in the elevating body 330. The restriction in both the upper and lower directions (particularly, the restriction in the upward direction) is difficult to be performed by the conventional crank mechanism, and is achieved for the first time by the gear shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 as in this embodiment. Is.

  As described above, the shape of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 can prevent the second gear 352 from rotating in a state in which the lifting body 330 is disposed at the raised position. Therefore, it is unnecessary to continuously apply the driving force of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) with a magnitude greater than its own weight in order to maintain the lifted position in the raised position, and energy consumption can be suppressed.

  In addition, although it is possible to maintain the lifting body 330 at the raised position using the dead center of the crank mechanism, there is a problem that the crank mechanism increases in size in accordance with the moving distance of the lifting body 330. there were. In the present embodiment, a crank mechanism is not required, and the rotation of the second gear 352 can be restricted by the relationship between the shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352, so the transmission portion can be reduced in size.

  A method for canceling the restriction on the rotation of the second gear 352 will be described. In the state shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, another member that interferes with the contact portion 351b is not provided in the rotation direction (the clockwise direction in FIG. 20) when the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 is rotated in the reverse direction. Therefore, the first gear 351 is allowed to rotate in the direction in which the elevating body 330 is lowered (the clockwise direction in FIG. 20).

  When the first gear 351 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 20 to the state shown in FIG. 19 and further rotated in the same direction, the restriction in the rotational direction of the second gear 352 is released (the contact portion 351b When the distal end surface is separated from the adjacent gear teeth 354 c), the elevating body 330 can be lowered. That is, the rotation restriction of the second gear 352 can be released by the rotation operation of the first gear 351, and the first gear 351 can perform another operation to release the rotation restriction of the second gear 352. Since it is unnecessary, the structure of the first gear 351 can be simplified.

  Next, the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 21 is a front perspective view of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. As shown in FIG. 21, the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 includes a drive side slide member 420 that has a rendering portion 422 a having a circular liquid crystal portion and moves up and down, and a member that moves up and down following the drive side slide member 420. A driven-side slide member 430 having a third symbol display device 81, and the drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430 are connected to a common guide bar 451 and configured to operate in the same direction. Is done.

  FIG. 22 is a front exploded perspective view of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. As shown in FIG. 22, the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 includes a base member 410 composed of a pair of long plate-shaped members, a drive-side slide member 420 configured to be movable up and down in the vertical direction, and driving thereof. A driven slide member 430 that is arranged above the side slide member 420 and configured to be movable in the vertical direction, a drive device 440 that generates a drive force for the drive side slide member 420 to move up and down, and generated from the drive device 440 The transmission device 450 having a pair of guide rods 451 for transmitting the drive force to the drive side slide member 420 and guiding the operations of the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430, and the lower ends of the pair of base members 410 And the lower front plate member 460 connected to the drive side slide member 420 and the left side of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 And a cover member 470 which is disposed on the front side of the upper, and mainly includes a.

  The base member 410 is a main body member 411 configured as a vertically long plate-like member, and a U-shaped concave portion that is disposed at a position that coincides with the upper and lower ends of the main body member 411 in the vertical direction and opens to the front. A guide rod support portion 412 that is configured, and a member that is arranged on the inner side (side closer to the other base member 410) than the vertical line drawn from the guide rod support portion 412 and extends to the front side of the main body member 411. A first shaft support portion 414 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape on the front side of the main body member 411 on the opposite side of the locking portion 413 across the vertical line drawn from the stop portion 413, the guide rod support portion 412, and the first A downward regulating member 415 that is pivotally supported by the pivotal support portion 414 and restricts the downward movement of the drive side slide member 420, and is arranged below the first pivotal support portion 414 and protrudes in a cylindrical shape on the front side of the main body member 411. A second shaft support 416, the elevation regulating member 417 for regulating the upward movement of the driven sliding member 430 while being axially supported on the second shaft support portion 416 mainly comprises a.

  The guide rod support portion 412 is a portion that supports both ends of the guide rod 451 of the transmission device 450 and is formed with an opening width that can accommodate the guide rod 451. In this embodiment, when the cover member 470 is fastened and fixed to the base member 410, the opening on the front side of the guide rod support portion 412 is closed, and the guide rod 451 is fixed to the guide rod support portion 412.

  The locking portion 413 is a portion that vertically contacts the lower side surface of the fall preventing portion 435 of the driven side slide member 430, and the driven side slide member 430 is further lowered from the contact state. To regulate.

  The descending restricting member 415 and the ascending restricting member 417 are members that rotate as the drive-side slide member 420 moves up and down and have a role of restricting the movement of the driven-side slide member 430, and will be described in detail later.

  The drive-side slide member 420 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 at both left and right ends, and is moved up and down by a slide operation of the rack 452.

  The driven-side slide member 430 does not have an independent driving device, and is supported by the guide rods 451 so that the left and right ends can slide. In addition, the driven-side slide member 430 moves up and down following the up-and-down operation of the drive-side slide member 420. The driven-side slide member 430 includes a main body member 431 that has the third symbol display device 81 and is elongated in the left-right direction, a function unit 432 that is disposed at both ends of the main body member 431 in the left-right direction, and a function unit A guide hole 433 which is a hole drilled in the vertical direction in 432 and through which the guide rod 451 is inserted, and a hook-like part 434 which is extended and inclined in the laterally outward direction at the lower end of the functional part 432, The fall prevention part 435 extended mainly in the back side inside the guide hole 433 of the upper end part of the function part 432 (side adjacent to the other guide hole 433) is mainly provided.

  The hook-shaped portion 434 is a portion that is hooked by the rise restricting member 417. In the state where the driven side slide member 430 is disposed at the lowered position, the rise restricting member 417 wraps around and is hooked on the engagement surface 434a which is the upper side surface of the hook-shaped portion 434 (see FIG. 29), and the driven side slide. It is possible to prevent the member 430 from moving in the upward direction (for example, it is possible to prevent the member 430 from bouncing due to a drop reaction). Further, the hook-shaped portion 434 is inclined upward, and the engaging claw portion 417e of the upward restriction member 417 is formed in parallel with the inclination. Therefore, the engagement between the hook-shaped portion 434 and the upward restriction member 417 causes the left-right direction. Wobble can also be suppressed.

  Note that the shape of the distal end portion of the hook-shaped portion 434 (the outer side of the distal end portion of the engaging claw portion 417e in the state shown in FIG. 29 (the portion on the right side in FIG. 29)) is based on the movement locus of the engaging claw portion 417e. Is also shaped to fit below. Therefore, even when the engaging claw portion 417e and the hook-like portion 434 are engaged and a load is applied to each other, the lifting restricting member 417 can be rotated.

  The drive device 440 includes a drive motor 441 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 of the base member 410, and a drive gear 442 that is rotated by the drive force of the drive motor.

  The transmission device 450 includes a pair of guide rods 451 fixed to the guide rod support portion 412 of the base member 410, and is supported by the guide rods 451 so as to be slidable, and the drive side slide member 420 is fastened and fixed, and the drive gear 442. A rack 452 meshed from the inside (inside the pair of drive gears 442) and a vertically long plate-like contact wall 453 extending from the vicinity of the tooth base of the rack 452 to the front side are mainly provided.

  The abutting wall 453 has a role of rotating the ascending restriction member 417 to the release side and a role of moving the rack 452 away from the drive gear 442 by receiving the urging force of the ascending restriction member 417. The details will be described later. To do.

  The lower front plate member 460 is bent in such a manner that the left and right end portions are fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body member 411 of the base member 410 and the center portion is offset by a predetermined amount on the back side compared to the left and right end portions. A main body member 461 having a shape, a guide hole 462 drilled along the left-right direction in the left half of the main body member 461 (in a manner of rising and tilting toward the outside), and extending above the main body member 461 And a cylindrical passage portion 463 whose upper end is opened to the front side.

  The guide hole 462 is a long hole through which the slide shaft 423b of the wiring storage member 423 is slidably guided.

  The cylindrical passage portion 463 is a cylindrical member through which a sphere can pass, and the second passage formation of the drive side slide member 420 is performed in a state where the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the coupling position (see FIG. 31). A sphere that passes through the member 422 and flows down passes therethrough.

  With reference to FIGS. 23 to 25, a detailed configuration of the drive side slide member 420 will be described. 23 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side slide member 420, FIG. 24 is an exploded rear perspective view of the drive side slide member 420, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the drive side slide member 420.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the drive-side slide member 420 is a disk having a main body member 421 configured as a plate-like member elongated in the left-right direction and an effect portion 422 a configured from a circular liquid crystal. A second passage forming member 422 whose portion is fastened and fixed to the central portion of the main body member 421 from the front side, and a groove through which a sphere can pass to the left in front view from the disk portion; A wiring housing member 423 whose one end is pivotally supported at the lower left end of the forming member 422 when viewed from the front and whose other end is supported by the guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460, and a second flow path forming member 422. And a connection member 424 that has a passage portion that is pivotally supported along the circumferential direction of the shaft and serves as a portion for introducing a sphere into the groove portion 422b of the second flow path forming member 422.

  The main body member 421 opens to the front side in a guide portion 421a that constitutes a part of a cylindrical portion through which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted and a portion that extends from the center portion to the left in front view. And a discharge opening 421c formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction with a size equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere at the lower left end of the groove 421b. .

  The guide portion 421a is a groove portion having an arc-shaped cross section that is open to the back side and extends in the vertical direction. The open portion is closed by a rack 452 (see FIG. 22) of the transmission device 450, thereby guiding the guide rod. A cylindrical portion into which 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted is configured.

  The groove portion 421b is a member that forms a spherical passage in cooperation with the second passage forming member 422, and the sphere flowing down along the groove portion 421b is discharged to the back side of the main body member 421 through the discharge opening 421c. The

  The second passage forming member 422 includes an effect portion 422a composed of a circular liquid crystal, and a shaft support portion 422b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from a disk portion disposed on the back side of the circular liquid crystal to the back side, A sensor member 422c that is disposed below the shaft support portion 422b and detects the passage of the sphere, and a groove that opens to the back side with a width that allows the sphere that has passed the sensor member 422c to flow down. A shape that can accommodate the connecting member 424 between the groove portion 422d having the same shape, the guide portion 422e constituting the cylindrical portion through which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted, and the shaft support portion 422b and the sensor member 422c. And an accommodation recess 422f that is recessed.

  The shaft support portion 422b is a portion on which the connection member 424 is supported. In a state where the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is disposed at the coupling position, the sphere that has flowed down the left swing unit 500 passes through the sensor member 422c through the connection member 424, and then passes through the passage formed by the groove portions 422d and 421b. To do.

  The wiring housing member 423 is a member that houses the wiring that is extended from the lower front member 460 and the like and connected to the effect portion 422a and the like, and is a length that is pivotally supported by the left lower end portion of the second passage forming member 422 when viewed from the front. A main body 423a that is a bar-shaped portion having a U-shaped cross section and a columnar slide shaft 423b that protrudes from the lower end of the main body 423a to the back side are mainly provided.

  The main body portion 423a is a member that stores wiring in an inner portion formed in a U-shaped cross section, and is configured in a curved shape that is convex in a direction away from the second passage forming member 422 in the longitudinal direction. The Accordingly, the wiring can be loosened along the curved shape in the vicinity of the pivot support position with the second passage forming member 422, and the wiring can be prevented from being bent and disconnected.

  The slide shaft 423b is a bar-like portion that is inserted into the guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460.

  Next, the configuration of the connection member 424 will be described with reference to FIG. 26A is a front perspective view of the connection member 424, FIG. 26B is a front view of the connection member 424 in the direction of arrow XXVIb in FIG. 26A, and FIG. FIG. 27 is a rear view of the connection member 424 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVIc in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c), the connecting member 424 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is supported in the radial direction of the cylindrical portion 424a. A plate-like upper side wall 424b provided, and a curved plate-like lower side wall 424c disposed opposite to the upper side wall 424b with a length equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere below the upper side wall 424b when viewed from the front. Connecting the upper side wall 424b and the lower side wall 424c to the back side and connecting cover 424d, which is covered between the upper side wall 424b and the lower side wall 424c, and is wound around and connected to the cylindrical part 424a. And a torsion spring 424e that mainly applies a downward biasing force (counterclockwise in FIG. 25B) to the member 424.

  The upper side wall portion 424b is formed in such a manner that the width increases as it approaches the axis of the tubular portion 424a from the radial end portion of the tubular portion 424a, and the side surface is formed along a straight line in FIG. It is a plate-like part.

  The lower wall portion 424c is a plate-like portion that is curved along an arc centering on the axis of the cylindrical portion 424a, and a space that allows a sphere to pass therethrough is provided between the lower wall portion 424c and the upper wall portion 424b. Arranged.

  The connection cover 424d is a plate member that suppresses spilling of a sphere passing through the connection member 424 to the back side. In addition, the open part of the connection member 424 configured on the opposite side (front side) of the connection cover 424d is closed by the bottom part of the housing recess 422f of the second passage forming member 422 coming into contact with the front side. Thereby, it can suppress that a ball | bowl spills from the open part of the connection member 424. FIG.

  With reference to FIGS. 27 and 28, the operation of the connecting member 424 with respect to the second passage forming member 422 will be described. 27 and 28 are rear views of the second passage forming member 422 and the connecting member 424. FIG. 27 shows a downwardly inclined state in which the open portion constituted by the upper wall portion 424b and the lower wall portion 424c of the connection member 424 faces the left-right direction, and in FIG. 28, the connection is made in comparison with the state of FIG. FIG. 27 corresponds to a separated state (see FIG. 41), which will be described later, and FIG. 28 corresponds to a separated state (see FIG. 41), in which an open portion constituted by the upper wall portion 424b and the lower wall portion 424c of the member 424 faces obliquely upward. This corresponds to a communication state (see FIG. 42) described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the connection member 424 can rotate around the shaft support portion 422b while being accommodated in the accommodation recess 422f of the second passage formation member 422. The front side end surfaces of the upper side wall part 424b and the lower side wall part 424c are brought into contact with the bottom part of the housing recess 422f.

  In the state shown in FIG. 27, the housing recess 422f is formed in an arc shape centered on the shaft support portion 422b along the outer diameter of the lower wall portion 424c in a portion opposed to the lower wall portion 424c of the connection member 424. The curved wall portion 422f1 and the surface opposed to the curved wall portion 422f1 are recessed in a direction away from the curved wall portion 422f1, and smoothly connected to the upper wall portion 424b of the connection member 424 in the inclined state (see FIG. 42). An opposing wall portion 422f2 having a curved surface.

  Since the curved wall portion 422f1 is brought into contact with the lower wall portion 424c in the radial direction in the downwardly inclined state of the connecting member 424, the displacement of the connecting member 424 in the axial radial direction can be suppressed.

  Therefore, even if the fitting between the shaft support portion 422b and the tubular portion 424a of the connection member 424 is loosened (a state where the gap is large, for example, a state where the dimension is between 0.5 mm and 1 mm), the connection member When 424 is in the downward inclined state, the posture of the connecting member 424 can be maintained with high accuracy by the contact between the lower wall portion 424c and the curved wall portion 422f1.

  On the other hand, when loosening the fitting between the shaft support portion 422b and the cylindrical portion 424a of the connection member 424, since the operation resistance generated in the shaft support portion is reduced, the connection is made unless a load from other members occurs. The member 424 can be reliably maintained in the downward inclined state by the action of gravity and the biasing force of the torsion spring 424e. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the connection member 424 is maintained in the upwardly inclined state even when no load is generated from other members.

  The opposing wall portion 422f2 is a portion that guides the sphere from the connection member 424 to the sensor member 422c. In the present embodiment, the surface facing the curved wall portion 422f1 is curved, so that the sphere can be smoothly guided to the sensor member 422c.

  The upward inclined state is formed in a communication state in which the first passage forming member 520 and the connection member 424 of the left swing unit 500 are communicated. In this state, since the lower wall portion 424c is separated from the opening of the sensor member 422c, the ball that rolls and passes through the lower wall portion 424c of the connection member 424 rolls on the curved wall portion 422f1, and the sensor member 422c Passing through the opening, it flows down the groove 422d.

  On the other hand, the downward inclined state is formed in a separated state in which the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 of the left swing unit 500 are separated. In this state, the lower wall portion 424c extends to the inside of the opening of the sensor member 422c, and the lower end portion of the lower wall portion 422c and the wall surface (the sensor member 422c) of the housing recess 422f disposed to face the lower end portion. The dimension between the first wall and the wall surface extending vertically upward is equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere, so that the sphere is prevented from passing through the connecting member 424 (the sphere is discharged from the lower end).

  Therefore, as described later, even when the sphere reaches the connection member 424 in the separated state, the flow of the sphere can be stopped by the connection member 424.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 29 to 33, the raising and lowering operations of the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 will be described. First, the positional relationship among the drive side slide member 420, the driven side slide member 430, and the base member 410 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 29 is a front view of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400, and FIG. 30 is a side view of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXX in FIG. 29 and 30 show a state in which the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are disposed at the lowered position, and the pair of left and right cover members in the cover member 470 are not shown. The transmission member 450 is visible. In FIG. 29, the lowering restricting member 415 and the raising restricting member 417 on the right side when viewed from the front are partially enlarged, and the rack immediately before the contact wall 453 and the release convex portion 417c of the raising restricting member 417 come into contact with each other. The outline of 452 is illustrated with imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, in the driven side slide member 430, in the lowered position, the fall prevention portion 435 is brought into contact with the locking portion 413 of the base member 410 from the lower side, and the hook-like portion 434 is raised. It abuts on the regulating member 417 from above. As described above, the driven-side slide member 430 is configured to be restricted from moving in both the upper and lower directions, so that the driven-side slide member 430 can be prevented from rattling in the vertical direction at the lowered position.

  In addition, the rising restricting member 417 and the locking portion 413 are disposed across the guide rod 451 inserted through the guide hole 433, and these can be brought into contact with the functional portion 432 of the driven side slide member 430. It is possible to suppress the portion 432 from rattling in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the guide rod 451 (the left-right direction in FIG. 29). Therefore, even if a disturbance occurs in the driven slide member 430 at the moment when it is placed at the lowered position or when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is struck by a player, the driven slide member 430 will rattle. And the effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

  Further, since the vertical position of the ascending restriction member 417 and the locking portion 413 are shifted, the functional portion 432 is rattled in an oblique direction (for example, the direction connecting the locking portion 413 and the rising restriction member 417). This can be suppressed. Therefore, even if a disturbance occurs in the driven slide member 430, such as when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is struck by the player at the moment when it is placed at the lowered position, the driven slide member 430 may rattle. And the effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

  In addition, since the locking portion 413 is displaced upward as compared with the ascending restriction member 417, the locking portion 413 is disposed at a position far from the drive side slide member 420, and the lock portion 413 is driven side slide. It is possible to make it difficult to prevent the member 420 from moving up and down. Therefore, the design freedom of the drive side slide member 420 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the lowering restricting member 415 is disposed in front of the raising restricting member 417, and the height of formation of the contact wall 453 of the transmission device 450 (the protruding length from the vicinity of the tooth base of the rack 452). Therefore, the lowering restriction member 415 and the abutting wall 453 are not in contact with each other in the rotational direction of the lowering restriction member 415. Further, since the hook-shaped portion 434 is disposed at the same position in the front-rear direction as the ascent restriction member 417, the hook-like portion 434 and the lowering restriction member 415 do not contact in the up-down direction.

  On the other hand, the rack 452 includes a protruding plate 453a that protrudes from the upper end portion of the abutting wall 453 to the front side, and the protruding plate 453a can be brought into contact with the lowering restriction member 415 in the rotation direction.

  FIG. 31 is a front view of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400. In FIG. 31, the drive-side slide member 420 is lifted from the lowered position and disposed at the connection position, and the pair of left and right cover members in the cover member 470 is omitted. In FIG. 31, the lowering restricting member 415 and the raising restricting member 417 on the right side when viewed from the front are partially enlarged.

  In a state where the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the coupling position, a sphere can be introduced into the connection member 424 via the left swing unit 500 (see FIG. 42).

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 31, the rise restricting member 417 is a member that covers the flange-like portion 434 from the upper side before the upper end portion of the abutting wall 453 is brought into contact with the rise restricting member 417. It is possible to rotate between the engaged state shown in FIG. 29 and the released state shown in FIG. The release state is not limited to the state of FIG. 31, and means a state in which the rise restricting member 417 is rotated from the vertically upper side of the bowl-shaped portion 434 to the posture in which the rise restricting member 417 is retracted.

  The rise restricting member 417 includes a cylindrical portion 417a that is pivotally supported by the second pivotal support portion 416, an extension plate 417b that extends linearly in the tangential direction of the cylindrical portion 417a, and one of the extension plates 417b. A release protrusion 417c that protrudes vertically from the end (lower end), an engagement protrusion 417d that protrudes vertically from the other end of the extension plate 417b, and the engagement protrusion In the engaged end portion of 417d, the engagement portion extends in parallel with the extending direction of the hook-like portion 434 and is disposed above and inward of the tip end portion of the hook-like portion 434 (upper left of the enlarged view of FIG. 29). A claw portion 417e, a separation inclined portion 417f that is inclined downward on the upper side surface of the protruding end portion of the engaging convex portion 417d, and one end portion of the cylindrical member 417a are wound around the main body member 411 of the base member 410. The rise restricting member 417 is wound inward by being locked. Mainly it includes a spring 417g torsion biasing (Figure 29 enlarged view counterclockwise direction), the.

  The extending plate 417b extends upward from the axis of the cylindrical portion 417a. As a result, when the release convex portion 417c is pushed up, the other end of the extension plate 417b can be moved away from the driven slide member 430, and the release operation can be performed.

  In the engaged state, the engaging claw portion 417e engages with the hook-shaped portion 434 even when the driven-side slide member 430 moves upward (the engaging claw portion between the hook-shaped portion 434 and the functional portion 432). 417e), the movement of the driven slide member 430 is strongly suppressed.

  The releasing operation of the rise restricting member 417 will be described. First, in the state shown in FIG. 29, the upper end of the abutting wall 453 is brought into contact with the release convex portion 417c, while the ascending restriction member 417 is maintained in the engaged state. From this state, when the rack 452 is moved up to the state shown in FIG. 31, the end of the abutting wall 453 pushes up the release convex portion 413c, so that the rising restricting member 417 is rotated outward (clockwise in FIG. 31). ), And the engaging convex portion 417d is retracted from above the hook-shaped portion 434 (released state).

  In other words, the release operation of the ascending restriction member 417 can be performed only by the ascending operation of the rack 452. Therefore, for example, as compared with the case where a separate solenoid member that performs the release operation of the rise restricting member 417 is provided separately, the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 22) also serves as the drive device that performs the release operation of the rise restricting member 417. And the number of drive devices can be reduced (product cost can be reduced). Moreover, it can suppress that the raise control member 417 is operated carelessly.

  In other words, according to the present embodiment, since the rise restricting member 417 is operated according to the arrangement of the rack 452, compared to the case where the rise restricting member 417 is operated by another drive source (solenoid or the like), It is possible to prevent malfunction due to the timing of the operation of the rack 452 and the rise restricting member 417 not matching each other, and when the driven side slide member 430 moves upward, the rise restricting member 417 is surely shifted to the release state. Can be made. For example, it is possible to prevent the rack 452 from being lifted while the rise restricting member 417 is engaged, and an excessive load being applied to the hook-like portion 434 and the engagement convex portion 417d of the rise restricting member 417.

  Further, since the rack 452 is moved upward and the lift restricting member 417 is shifted to the released state immediately before the upper end of the rack 452 and the lower end of the driven slide member 430 are brought into contact with each other, the rack 452 continues to move upward. Only when the driven-side slide member 430 and the drive-side slide member 420 are separated from each other, an engaged state (see FIG. 29) is configured to prevent rattling of the driven-side slide member 430, while the driven-side slide In a state where the member 430 and the driving side slide member 420 are in contact with each other, a release state (see FIG. 31) is formed, and a driving force necessary for raising the driven side sliding member 430 can be suppressed.

  Here, as in the present embodiment, when the drive-side slide member 420 pushes up the driven-side slide member 430 during the ascending operation of the drive-side slide member 420, the driven-side slide member 430 and the engagement portion are released. Can be performed by pushing up the driven slide member 430, but in this case, it is necessary to establish an engagement state that can be released by the pushing force of the driven slide member 430, and it is difficult to perform strong engagement. It becomes. Also, in this case, there is a problem that the driven slide member 430 vibrates due to the reaction that occurs when the driven slide member 430 and the engaging portion are released, and the posture becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the engagement is released by rotating the ascent restricting member 417 and retracting the ascent restricting member 417 from above the hook-like portion 434 of the driven slide member 430. The force that can be applied to the driven side slide member 430 and the force that rotates the ascending restriction member 417 can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to increase the force that suppresses the upward movement of the driven-side slide member 430 in the engaged state while suppressing the force necessary for release.

  In addition, since the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 do not come into contact with each other when the lifting restricting member 417 is released, the driven side slide member 430 is less likely to react, and the driven side slide member 430 is released. Can stabilize the posture.

  In the connected state shown in FIG. 31, the discharge opening 421c of the drive side slide member 420 and the cylindrical passage portion 463 of the lower front plate member 460 are communicated with each other. As a result, the sphere that has flowed down the second passage forming member 422 can be discharged to the cylindrical passage portion 463.

  32 and 33 are front views of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400. FIG. 32 illustrates a state in which the drive-side slide member 420 is lifted from the state illustrated in FIG. 31 and the projecting plate 453a of the transmission device 450 is coming into contact with the descending restriction member 415. In FIG. 32, the drive side slide member 420 is lifted from the state shown in FIG. 32, and the state where the convex plate 453a is disposed at the lifted position on the upper side of the drop restricting member 415 is illustrated. In FIG. 33, the vicinity of the lowering restriction member 415 is partially enlarged.

  In the state illustrated in FIG. 32, the release convex portion 417 c of the rise restricting member 417 is brought into contact with the contact wall 453 of the transmission device 450. In the present embodiment, the pair of transmission devices 450 are arranged symmetrically in the left-right direction, and the direction in which the release convex portion 417c contacts the contact wall 453 is also left-right symmetrical. Therefore, the release convex portion 417c functions as a guide for guiding the drive side slide member 420, and it is possible to suppress the drive side slide member 420 from rattling in the left-right direction during the raising / lowering operation.

  Since the rise restricting member 417 is urged in the left-right inward direction of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 by the torsion spring 417g, a load in the left / right inward direction of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is applied to the contact wall 453 from the release convex portion 417c. It can be applied. As a result, the drive side slide member 420 is urged in a certain direction along the left-right direction, so that the posture of the drive side slide member 420 during the raising / lowering operation can be stabilized.

  Further, when the driving-side slide member 420 is displaced in the left-right direction, the elastic force applied to the contact wall 453 from the release convex portion 417c is a mode in which the driving-side slide member 420 is returned to the center position, The rise restricting member 417 is asymmetric in the left-right direction.

  That is, on the side where the abutment wall 453 moves in the direction approaching the release convex portion 417c, the rise restricting member 417 is further rotated to the release side, whereby the deformation amount of the torsion spring 417g is increased and the biasing force is increased. While the force to push back the contact wall 453 increases, the rise restricting member 417 is rotated in the direction opposite to the release side on the side where the contact wall 453 moves away from the release convex portion 417c, whereby the torsion spring 417g. The amount of deformation is reduced, the urging force is reduced, and the force pushing the contact wall 453 is reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress rattling in the left-right direction when the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down.

  Since the drive gear 442 and the rise restricting member 417 are disposed on the same side with respect to the rack 452, the urging force of the torsion spring 417g acts in a direction to separate the rack 452 from the drive gear 442, so that the drive side slide member 420 is It is possible to prevent the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 from approaching each other in the left-right direction and increase the drive resistance (the interval between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 can be stabilized).

  That is, when the drive-side slide member 420 rattles in the left-right direction and the rack 452 moves in the direction approaching the drive gear 442, the ascending restriction member 417 is wound outward (the engaging convex portion 417d is the left-right outer side of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 , The amount of deformation of the torsion spring 417g is increased, and the biasing force is increased to increase the biasing force to push back the drive side slide member 420, while the rack 452 is driven. When moving in a direction away from the gear 442, the guide bar 451 supports the rack 452, so that the rack 452 is separated from the drive gear 442 more than the gap provided in the support structure between the guide bar 451 and the rack 452. Is regulated. As a result, the gap between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 422 is narrowed, and it is possible to prevent the meshing resistance from becoming excessive, and the gap between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 422 is widened, resulting in tooth misalignment. This can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in the state where the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are arranged at the raised position, the lower side surface of the projection plate 453a of the transmission device 450 is the release projection 415c of the lowering restriction member 415. Abuts the upper side (locked state).

  The projecting plate 453a includes an inclined side surface 453a1 that is inclined upward toward the left and right outer sides on the lower side surface.

  The descending inclined member 415 includes a cylindrical portion 415a that is pivotally supported by the first pivotal support portion 414, an extension plate 415b that extends linearly in the tangential direction of the cylindrical portion 415a, and one of the extension plates 415b. A release convex portion 415c that is vertically projected from the end portion (upper end portion) and has a tip formed in a semicircular shape, and one end portion is engaged with the main body member 411 of the base member 410 while being wound around the cylindrical portion 415a. A torsion spring 415d that mainly biases the lowering restricting member 415 in the inner winding direction (counterclockwise direction in the enlarged view of FIG. 33) when stopped.

  As illustrated in FIG. 33, the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 is locked by the lowering restriction member 415. Therefore, the supply of the driving force of the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 22) can be stopped while the rack 452 is held in the raised position, and the power consumption of the drive motor 441 can be reduced.

  Also, the rotation operation of the lowering restricting member 415 to the locked state shown in FIG. 33 is performed when the rack 452 is raised and the protruding plate 453a gets over the release protruding portion 415c of the lowering restricting member 415. Therefore, both the driving force for raising the rack 452 and the driving force for forming the locked state of the lowering restricting member 415 can be generated by the driving motor 441 (see FIG. 2). That is, the drive motor 441 can also be used, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Returning to FIG. 30, the positional relationship in the front-rear direction of the lowering restricting member 415, the raising restricting member 417, and the contact wall 453 will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, the lowering restricting member 415 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 30) compared to the raising restricting member 417, and the abutting wall 453 can abut on the ascending restricting member 417 in the direction perpendicular to FIG. The lower side surface of the lowering restricting member 415 can come into contact with the front side surface of the contact wall 453.

  Returning to FIG. The lowering restriction member 415 and the contact wall 453 are contacted in the front-rear direction. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 33, the abutting wall 453 and the rise restricting member 417 are abutted in the left-right direction (left and right direction in FIG. 33), and the abutting wall 453 and the descending restricting member 415 are in the front-rear direction (FIG. 33 paper surface). In the vertical direction). As a result, rattling of the drive-side slide member 420 in the left-right direction can be suppressed by the rise restricting member 417, and the front-rear direction (direction parallel to the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442) can be prevented by the drop restricting member 415. Shaking can be suppressed.

  Therefore, the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 can be prevented from relatively reducing the area of the meshing surface due to the relative movement in the direction parallel to the tooth surface, and the rack 452 can be tilted forward in a state where the rack 452 is disposed at the raised position. Can be prevented.

  When the rack 452 is lowered by rotating the drive gear 442 in the direction in which the rack 452 is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 33, the convex plate 453a applies a load to the release convex portion 415c, whereby the lowering restriction member 415 is rotated outward (clockwise in the enlarged view of FIG. 33). As a result, the locking by the lowering restriction member 415 is released, and the driving side slide member 420 can be lowered. That is, the release by the lowering restricting member 415 can be released by the driving force of the driving motor 441 (can also be used as a driving source), so that the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, since the lowering restricting member 415 is unlocked by the lowering operation of the driving side slide member 420, the operation timing is shifted and the lowering restriction is controlled as when the lowering restricting member 415 is rotated by another drive source. It is possible to prevent the drive-side slide member 420 from being lowered before the restriction of the member 415 is released, so that an overload is generated in the drive source and the lowering restriction member 415.

  In the structure in which both the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are maintained at the raised position in the raised position as in this embodiment, the driven side slide member 430 is locked at the raised position of each member. However, in this case, the structure for connecting and separating the driven-side slide member 430 and the drive-side slide member 420 becomes complicated and the cost increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the driven side slide member 430 is held in the raised position by locking the driven side slide member 420, and therefore the driven side slide member 430 and the driven side slide member 420 are maintained in the raised position. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the configuration required for this purpose (only the driving device 450 and the driving side slide member 420 can be provided). Further, the interlocking of the driven side slide member 430 with the drive side slide member 420 is based on the action of gravity, thereby simplifying the structure between the driven side slide member 430 and the drive side slide member 420. it can.

  When the rack 452 is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 33, the driven-side slide member 430 descends on the rack 452, but the guide rod 451 and the guide hole 433 (see FIG. 22) become dirty, for example, because the guide rod 451 becomes dirty. ) Is large, the descending speed of the driven slide member 430 may be smaller than the descending speed of the rack 452. Even in this case, when the driven-side slide member 430 comes into contact with the rise restricting member 417, the hook-like portion 434 acts on the separation inclined portion 417f of the rise restricting member 417, so that the rise restricting member 417 can be rotated. The rising restriction member 417 and the hook-shaped portion 434 can be engaged by the own weight of the driven side slide member 430.

  Next, the left swing unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42. FIG. 34 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIG. 34, the left swing unit 500 is disposed on the back side of the second variable winning device 82a and the second specific winning port 82 of the game board 13, and the ball that won the second specific winning port 82 is displayed. A flow path is provided on the inside. In the present embodiment, a sensor member 82b that detects that a ball has passed is disposed between the second variable winning device 82a and the second specific winning port 82. The sensor member 82b is a part of various switches 208 (see FIG. 4).

  FIG. 35 is a front perspective view of the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIG. 35, the left swing unit 500 is configured in such a manner that the first passage forming member 520 is hung downward and to the right when viewed from the front, and is a unit that produces effects by swinging the first passage forming member 520. is there.

  FIG. 36 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit 500, and FIG. 37 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left swing unit 500. 36 and 37, the left swing unit 500 includes a base member 510 that forms a skeleton, a first passage forming member 520 that is pivotally supported by the base member 510, and a base. A driving device 530 that is fastened and fixed to the member 510 and generates a driving force of the first passage forming member 520; a transmission device 540 that transmits the driving force of the driving device 530 to the first passage forming member 520; And a cover member 550 having an introduction cylindrical portion 552 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and connected to the second specific winning port 82 of the game board 13.

  The base member 510 includes a main body member 511 formed of a L-shaped plate body in front view, a shaft support hole 512 formed in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at the right end portion in front view of the main body member, and the shaft support. A first wall portion 513 that is disposed vertically above the hole 512 and has a planar plate shape with its surface facing in the front-rear direction, and one or more spheres leftward from the lower left end of the first wall portion 513 in front view. A second wall portion 514 configured in a curved plate shape that is disposed with a space therebetween and directs the surface in the left-right direction, and a sphere that is disposed on the back side of the second wall portion 514 and reaches the second wall portion 514 A downflow passage 515 that flows down, a shaft support portion 516 that is disposed in the lower left side of the shaft support hole 512 in front view and protrudes in a columnar shape on the front side, and a latch that is disposed around the shaft of the shaft support portion 516. A wall 517 and a detection sensor 518 disposed above the shaft support 516 to detect the phase of the transmission device; To prepare for.

  The shaft support hole 512 is a hole through which the shaft support portion 521c of the first passage forming member 520 is inserted, and the first passage forming member 520 is swung around the shaft support hole 512.

  The 1st wall part 513 is provided with a pair of guide wall part 513a extended from the left-right direction both ends to the front side.

  The locking wall portion 517 includes an arc wall portion 517a having an arc shape centered on the shaft support portion 516 above the shaft support portion 516, and an inclined wall portion 517b extending to the lower right in front view. .

  The arc wall portion 517 a is an end surface of the detection sensor 518 and extends to a circumferential end surface of the shaft support portion 516.

  The first passage forming member 520 is a long rod-shaped distribution base member 521 that is a member supported by the shaft support hole 512, and is disposed on the front side of the distribution base member 521. And a passage cover member 522 that is fastened and fixed and forms a passage through which a sphere can flow down between the base member 521 and the sorting base member 521.

  The distribution base member 521 has a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 521a that constitutes one side of the flow path of the sphere, and one sphere along the extending direction of the hanging plate portion 521a from the upper end portion of the hanging plate portion 521a. An intermediate plate portion 521b disposed at a position separated by a gap V1 and a shaft support portion 521c that protrudes in a columnar shape on the back side in the vicinity of the upper end portion of the hanging plate portion 521a and is inserted through the shaft support hole 512. A long hole 521d formed in a plate-like portion extending in the radial direction of the shaft support portion 521c along the extending direction, and a rear side from an end portion on the hanging plate portion 521a side of the intermediate plate portion 521b. And the gap V1 along the left side surface of the distribution convex portion 521e as viewed from the rear side, and a distribution convex portion 521e configured such that the width decreases toward the radially outer side of the shaft support portion 521c. The upper end of the hanging plate portion 521a that extends to the front side Mainly and a curved wall portion 521f which is curved along the arc shape having a center.

  The drooping plate portion 521a has a shape in which the lower side from the middle portion is bent downward as compared with the upper side from the middle portion, and the front plate thickness portion is scraped and thinned at the lower end portion of the ball feeding portion. 521a1 is provided.

  The gap V1 is a space through which a sphere that has reached the right side of the front surface of the distribution convex portion 521e passes in the front direction.

  The passage cover member 522 extends in the form of a plate from the plate-like plate-like portion 522a that covers the front side of the sorting base member 521, and from both ends in the short-side direction of the plate-like portion 522a toward the back side. The upper and lower wall portions 522b are mainly provided.

  The plate-like portion 522a is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and a ball receiving portion 522a1 bent at the back side in a portion disposed on the front side of the ball feeding portion 521a1 of the sorting base member 521 at the lower end thereof. Prepare.

  The upper and lower wall portions 522b are portions for rolling the sphere that has passed through the gap V1, and the inclination angle changes at the intermediate portion as in the case of the hanging plate portion 521a. Therefore, the flow velocity of the sphere can be changed at the intermediate portion. it can.

  A step is provided on the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 522b inside the tip portion. The step has a role of decelerating the sphere by displacing the rolling sphere in a direction facing the upper and lower wall portions 522b (a direction from one wall portion to the other wall portion).

  Further, the sphere that has reached the lower end of the first passage forming member 520 is directed toward the back side by the ball feeding portion 521a1 and the ball receiving portion 522a1. Thereby, the speed of the sphere before discharge can be reduced, and the discharge of the sphere can be stabilized.

  The drive device 530 includes a drive motor 531 and a drive gear 532 that is pivotally supported on the rotation shaft of the drive motor 531, and the drive gear 532 is engaged with the main body gear portion 541 of the transmission device 540.

  The transmission device 540 includes a main body gear portion 541 that is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 516 and meshed with the drive gear 532, and a first passage forming member that protrudes in a columnar shape from the eccentric position of the main body gear portion 541 to the front side. An eccentric convex portion 542 inserted into the long hole 521d of 520, a radial extension extending from the main body gear portion 541, and a contact with the locking wall portion 517 are possible, and the gap between the detection sensors 518 can be passed. Extending portion 543 mainly.

  The cover member 550 is connected to the plate-shaped main body member 551 that covers the base member 510, and the second specific prize opening 82 at the right end of the main body member 551 when viewed from the front, and the rear end is the first. A cylindrical introduction cylindrical portion 552 that comes into contact with the wall portion 513, and a pair of guide wall portions 553 that extend downward from the left and right end portions of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 on the back side surface of the main body member 551. Prepare mainly.

  The guide wall portion 553 is a portion that overlaps with the guide wall portion 513a of the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The sphere that has passed through the introduction cylindrical portion 552 flows down between the guide wall portions 513a and 553.

  With reference to FIGS. 38 to 40, the swinging operation of the first passage forming member 520 will be described. 38 to 40 are front views of the swing operation unit 500. FIG. 38 to 40, the illustration of the cover member 550 is omitted, the outer shape of the first passage forming member 520 viewed in cross-section at the middle position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 521a is shown, and the passage cover member The outer shape is illustrated with imaginary lines.

  38, the state where the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position is shown in FIG. 39A. In FIG. 39A, the first passage forming member 520 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. In the state where the minute convex portion 521e is disposed at the intermediate position between the pair of guide wall portions 513a, in FIG. 39 (b), the first passage forming member 520 swings a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 39 (a). FIG. 40 shows a state immediately before contacting the connecting member 424, and FIG. 40 shows a state in which the first passage forming member 520 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. The

  As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the swinging motion of the first passage forming member 520 occurs when the transmission device 540 is rotated and the position of the long hole 521d is moved along with the movement of the eccentric convex portion 542.

  As shown in FIG. 38, at the release position, the direction X1 connecting the shaft support portion 516 and the eccentric convex portion 542 and the direction X2 coinciding with the extending direction of the long hole 521d (the radial direction of the shaft support portion 521c) intersect perpendicularly. To do. Therefore, since the load given to the eccentric convex part 542 is directed to the shaft support part 516 when the first passage forming member 520 starts to rotate, it is possible to suppress the generation of a load that rotates the transmission device 540. Accordingly, the attitude of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuously applying a driving force to the drive gear 532, and the power consumption of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.

  Further, at the release position, the extending portion 543 of the transmission device 540 is disposed in the gap of the detection sensor 518 and is in contact with the end portion of the arc wall portion 517a. That is, the extending portion 543 has both a role as a portion used for detecting the phase of the transmission device 540 and a role as a rotation preventing member.

  As shown in FIG. 38, at the release position, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed to face the guide wall portion 513a on the right side of the base member 510 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is distributed to the path on the left side of the front view by the distribution convex portion 521e, and is discharged out of the game area through the flow-down passage 515. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 39A, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed at an intermediate position between the pair of guide wall portions 513a of the base member 510 at an intermediate position between the release position and the connection position. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is stopped by the distribution convex portion 521e (it remains on the tip of the distribution convex portion 521e). ).

  As shown in FIG. 39B, the distribution convex portion 521 e is disposed between the pair of guide wall portions 513 a of the base member 510 in a state immediately before the first passage forming member 520 contacts the connection member 424. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and has passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is stopped by the distribution convex portion 521e (while remaining on the tip of the distribution convex portion 521e, stay). Thereby, in the state of FIG. 39B, the sphere passes through the first passage forming member 520, is sent to the connecting member 424, and the sphere is prevented from reaching the opposing wall portion 422f2.

  Here, since the opposing wall portion 422f2 is smoothly connected to the upper wall portion 424b of the connection member 424 in the upward inclined state (see FIG. 42), the upper end portion is connected to the connecting member 424 in the downward inclined state (see FIG. 41). It is set as the aspect which protrudes from the lower end part of the upper side wall part 424b to front view left side. Therefore, when the sphere is sent to the connection member 424 in the downward inclined state and the sphere collides with the upper end portion of the opposing wall portion 422f2, the opposing wall portion 422f2 may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 39 (b), since the introduction of the sphere into the first passage forming member 520 is prevented, it is possible to prevent the sphere from colliding with the opposing wall portion 422f2. It is possible to prevent the opposing wall portion 422f2 from being damaged.

  As shown in FIG. 40, at the connecting position, the direction X1 connecting the shaft support portion 516 and the eccentric convex portion 542 and the direction X2 coinciding with the extending direction of the long hole 521d (the radial direction of the shaft support portion 521c) intersect perpendicularly. To do. Therefore, since the load given to the eccentric convex part 542 is directed to the shaft support part 516 when the first passage forming member 520 starts to rotate, it is possible to suppress the generation of a load that rotates the transmission device 540. Accordingly, the attitude of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuously applying a driving force to the drive gear 532, and the power consumption of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.

  In addition, the extended portion 543 of the transmission device 540 comes into contact with the inclined wall portion 517b at the coupling position. Thus, the extension portion 543 is compared with a case where a load is locally applied to the extension portion 543 while stabilizing the phase of stopping the transmission device 540 by abutting the extension portion 543 against the inclined wall portion 517b. The durability of 543 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 40, in the connected state, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed to face the guide wall portion 513a on the left side of the base member 510 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the sphere that reaches the first wall portion 513 and passes between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is distributed to the path on the right side of the front view by the distribution convex portion 521e, and moves to the front side through the gap V1. Rolling along the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 522b (see FIG. 37) of the passage cover member 522.

  The flow of the sphere in the connected state will be described. First, the ball that has won the second specific prize opening 82 from the game area through the second variable prize-winning device 82a moves back and forth through the introduction cylindrical part 552 (see FIG. 36) toward the back side, and the first wall part When contacted with 513, it flows down the passage formed by the guide wall portions 513a and 553, moves back and forth toward the front side through the gap V1 of the first passage forming member 520, and the upper and lower wall portions of the passage cover member 522 Roll over the lower wall of 522b.

  That is, before the sphere flows down inside the first passage forming member 520, the sphere is sent in the front-rear direction. Therefore, even if the balls are supplied to the second specific winning opening 82 by connecting them in a rosary manner, the balls can be smoothly flowed into the first passage forming member 520 by preventing the balls from jumping. Further, the direction of the speed of the sphere can be changed by flowing down the sphere sent in the front-rear direction along the curved wall portion 521f (see FIG. 37), and the sphere smoothly flows into the first passage forming member 520. Can be made.

  As for the 1st channel | path formation member 520, the extending direction changes the boundary base member 521 and the channel | path cover member 522 on the boundary of an intermediate part. That is, the distribution base member 521 and the passage cover member 522 extend along the straight line Y1 from the intermediate portion to the proximal end side (the shaft support portion 521c side), and from the intermediate portion to the distal end side (the opposite side of the proximal end side). Is extended along a straight line Y2 inclined downward from the straight line Y1.

  Therefore, the speed of the sphere rolling inside the first passage forming member 520 is slower when it reaches the intermediate portion from the base end side than when it moves from the intermediate portion toward the distal end portion. Become. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the ball immediately after the ball is introduced into the first passage forming member 520.

  Further, as compared with the case where the first passage forming member 520 is configured in a straight shape along the straight line Y1, the direction in which the ball is sent from the first passage forming member 520 at the connection position (see FIG. 42) The angle with the direction (vertical direction) in which the sphere is introduced into the sensor member 422c can be reduced. Thereby, the ball feeding from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422 can be stabilized.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the first passage forming member 520 is swung by the rotation of the transmission device 540, and the path through which the sphere flows down is switched by the arrangement of the distribution convex portions 521e.

  Here, when a wall member disposed opposite to the distribution convex portion 521e in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed, the distribution convex portion 521e approaches the wall member to be equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere. When the configuration is adopted, when the sphere stays in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e, the sphere is caught between the distribution convex portion 521e and the wall member, which may cause malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at the connection position illustrated in FIG. 40, an interval equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere is provided between the distribution convex portion 521e and the second wall portion 514, and the distribution convex portion. A wall member is not disposed on the opposite side of the second wall portion 514 across the 521e and is opened. Therefore, a situation in which the ball is bitten in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e does not occur, and malfunction can be prevented.

  With reference to FIG.41 and FIG.42, the connection of the flow path of the liquid crystal raising / lowering unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 is demonstrated. 41 and 42 are partial front views of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the left swing unit 500. FIG. 41 and 42, the second passage forming member 422 is viewed in cross section so that the connection member 424 is visible, and the first passage forming member 520 has an outer shape at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 521a. The distribution convex part 521e shown in figure is visible.

  41 and 42 show a state in which the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 31), and in FIG. 41, the left swing unit 500 is disposed at the release position (see FIG. 38). FIG. 42 shows a state in which the left swing unit 500 is disposed at the coupling position (see FIG. 40).

  When the first passage forming member 520 is swung from the state shown in FIG. 41 to the state shown in FIG. 42, the distal end of the first passage forming member 520 comes into contact with the lower side surface of the upper wall portion 424b of the connection member 424, and the connection member 424 is moved. Rock. That is, since the connecting member 424 is moved along with the moving direction of the first passage forming member 520, for example, even if the stop position of the driving side slide member 420 is slightly deviated from the ideal position, It is possible to suppress the generation of a gap between the tip of the passage forming member 520 and the connection member 424. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the sphere from falling between the tip of the first passage forming member 520 and the connection member 424, and to stabilize the ball feeding from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422. Can do.

  As the connecting member 424 is swung, the lower wall portion 424c on which the sphere flowing down from the first passage forming member 520 rolls is moved in a direction approaching the tip of the first passage forming member 520. The gap between the rolling surfaces of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 can be narrowed, and the sphere is prevented from falling from the gap between the rolling surfaces of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424. This makes it possible to stabilize ball feeding.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 42, the lower side wall 424c is inclined downward toward the sensor member 422c communicated with the groove 422d (see FIG. 27). Thereby, the sphere can be rolled along its descending slope, and the sphere can be sent to the second passage forming member 422 in a stable manner.

  The swinging motion of the first passage forming member 520 is performed by detecting the passage of the sphere of the sensor member 82b (see FIG. 34) or the sensor member 422c. For example, in the state where the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the coupling position shown in FIG. 42, the number of detected balls of the sensor member 82b and the sensor member 422c matches (the sphere remains on the first passage forming member 520). The first passage forming member 520 starts swinging toward the release position (see FIG. 41) at the timing, thereby preventing the ball from being discharged out of the game area from the tip of the first passage forming member 520. can do.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, balls are distributed by the movement of the distribution convex portion 521e, and the first passage forming member 520 is swung so that the first passage forming member 520 and the connection member 424 are brought into contact with each other. The driving force necessary for the contact and the operation of forming the flow path of the sphere is also used (covered by the driving force of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) that operates the first passage forming member 520). Since the states are synchronized, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation where a sphere is introduced into the first passage forming member 520 in a state where the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from being discharged out of the game area from the tip of the first passage forming member 520.

  The distribution convex portion 521e is disposed on the upper end portion of the distribution base member 521, and defines a wall path of a sphere that flows down the front side of the hanging plate portion 521a (see FIG. 36) (forms an upper end). Doubles as As a result, it is possible to reduce the cost of parts compared to the case where the other parts are distributed, and to ensure that the balls distributed to the first passage forming member 520 side are suspended from the hanging plate portion 521a and the passage cover member. 522 can be introduced into the passage between the two.

  Next, the rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 77. 43 is a front view of the rotation unit 600, and FIG. 44 is a front perspective view of the rotation unit 600. 45 is a front view of the rotating unit 600 with the guide member 680 removed, and FIG. 46 is a front perspective view of the rotating unit 600 with the guide member 680 removed. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating unit 600, and FIG. 48 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 to 48, the rotation unit 600 includes a case member 610 formed in a container shape with one side opened, a guide member 620 covered on one side of the case member 610, and the cases. A driving mechanism 630 disposed between the member 610 and the guide member 620 facing each other, a rotating member 640 rotated by the driving force of the driving mechanism 630, and a pitching disposed on the inner peripheral side of the rotating member 640 The apparatus 650 mainly includes a guide member 680 disposed on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640.

  The case member 610 includes a bottom wall portion 611 having a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front, and a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 612 erected from the bottom wall portion 611 toward the front surface. It is formed in a container shape whose side is open. The guide member 620 is formed in a disc shape with an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed (adhered) to the standing tip of the outer wall portion 612 of the case member 610. Thus, an internal space is formed between the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610 and the guide member 620, and the drive mechanism 630 is disposed in the internal space.

  The guide member 620 is a member for holding the rotating member 640 so as to be displaceable, and a connection link action groove 621 and an undulating link action groove 622 are recessed in the front surface thereof. The connection link action groove 621 and the undulation link action groove 622 are concave grooves having a U-shaped cross section extending along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the connection link member 644 and the undulation link, which will be described later, of the rotation member 640. The insertion portions 644a and 648a of the member 648 are respectively inserted.

  In addition, the groove widths of the connection link action groove 621 and the undulation link action groove 622 are set to dimensions that are equal to or slightly larger than the diameters of the insertion portions 644 a and 648 a of the connection link member 644 and the undulation link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portions 644a and 648a of the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the connecting link operating groove 621 and the undulating link operating groove 622.

  When the rotation member 640 is driven to rotate, the connection link operation groove 621 acts on the connection link member 644 to increase or decrease the interval between the divided members DV (see FIG. 73), while the undulation link operation groove 622 It acts on the undulating link member 648 to undulate the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 (see FIGS. 59 and 60). Here, with reference to FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, the connecting link working groove 621 and the undulating link working groove 622 of the guide member 620 will be described.

  49 is a front view of the rotation unit 600 in a state where the rotation member 640, a part of the pitching device 650, and the guide member 680 are removed, and FIG. 50 is a schematic front view of the guide member 620. In FIG. 50, the shapes of the connecting link working groove 621 and the undulating link working groove 622 are schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line. Such a two-dot chain line is illustrated as a line passing through the center of the groove width of each working groove 621, 622.

  As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the connecting link working groove 621 has a large-diameter portion 621a that curves in an arc shape with a radius R1 around the axis O, and an arc shape with a radius R2 around the axis O. And a pair of connecting portions 621c that connect the large diameter portion 621a and the small diameter portion 621b. The radius R1 of the large diameter portion 621a is set to be larger than the radius R2 of the small diameter portion 621b (R2 <R1).

  The undulating link working groove 622 includes a large-diameter portion 622a that is curved in an arc shape with a radius R3 around the axis O, a small-diameter portion 622b that is curved in an arc shape with a radius R4 around the axis O, and these large-diameter portions. It consists of a pair of connection part 622c which connects between 622a and the small diameter part 622b. The radius R3 of the large diameter portion 622a is set to be larger than the radius R4 of the small diameter portion 622b (R4 <R3).

  In the present embodiment, the large-diameter portion 621a and the small-diameter portion 621b of the connecting link working groove 621 and the large-diameter portion 622a and the small-diameter portion 622b of the undulating link working groove 622 are arranged concentrically about the axis O. In this case, the axis O coincides with the rotation center when the rotating member 640 is rotated. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is rotated, the large diameter portions 621a and 622a and the small diameter portions 622a and 622b of the connecting link working groove 621 and the undulating link working groove 622 act on the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648, respectively. By suppressing the force, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Further, the pair of connection portions 621c of the connection link action groove 621 are arranged at positions that are different in phase by 180 degrees. Similarly, the pair of connecting portions 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 are arranged at positions that are different in phase by 180 degrees. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is rotationally driven, a force that is applied to the connecting link member 644 from one connecting portion 621c of the connecting link operating groove 621 and a force that is applied to the connecting link member 644 from the other connecting portion 621c. Can be offset. Similarly, the force applied to the undulation link member 648 from one connection portion 622c of the undulation link operation groove 622 can be canceled out from the force applied to the undulation link member 648 from the other connection portion 622c. Thereby, since the force applied to the rotating member 640 can be made uniform as a whole, the rotation of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced. .

  In this embodiment, the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link working groove 621 and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link working groove 622 are formed to have different phases. That is, in a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621, the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link member 648 is the large diameter portion 622a or the small diameter portion of the undulation link operation groove 622. When the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link member 648 is inserted into the connection portion 622c of the undulation link action groove 622, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into one of the portions 622b. The working groove 621 is inserted into either the large diameter part 621a or the small diameter part 621b.

  Since the connection portions 621c and 622c are portions for changing the interval of the divided member DV or displacing the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647, the insertion portion receives a relatively large reaction force from the connection portions 621c and 622c. By preventing the 644a and 648a from being inserted through the connecting portions 621c and 622c at the same time, the necessary driving force can be dispersed. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Returning from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the drive mechanism 630 will be described. The drive mechanism 630 is a mechanism for rotationally driving the rotation member 640, and includes a drive motor 631, a pinion gear 632 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 631, and a leading gear (first transmission gear) to the pinion gear 632. 633a), a central transmission body 634 having a gear 634a meshed with the last gear (second transmission gear 633b) of the transmission gear train, and a gear 634a of the central transmission member 634 One side distribution gear train and the other side distribution gear train meshed with the leading gear (first distribution gears 635a, 636a) and the last gear (third distribution gear train) of the one side distribution gear train and the other side gear train 1 side rotation drive member 637 and other side rotation drive member 638 which have gears 637a and 638a meshed with gears 635c and 636c) are mainly provided. Note that second distribution gears 635b and 636b are interposed between the first distribution gears 635a and 636a and the third distribution gears 635c and 636c, respectively.

  The one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 are members that become the end of the transmission path (the output end in the drive mechanism 630) that transmits the rotation drive force generated from the drive motor 631. While rotating itself by the rotational driving force, the rotating member 640 is rotated by the rotation. Here, the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 51A is a front view of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation member 638, and FIG. 51B is a one-side rotation member 637 and the others on the LIb-LIb line in FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of a side rotation member 638. FIG.

  Since the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638 are members formed in the same shape, only the one side rotation driving member 637 will be described, and the other side rotation driving member 638 will be described. Only the code | symbol is attached | subjected in the figure of FIG. 51, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the one-side rotation drive member 637 is formed in a disc shape, and engagement portions 637b are recessed in a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. It is formed.

  The engaging portion 637b is a portion that engages with the engaged portion 641 (see FIG. 56) in the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, and has a width (interval between opposing surfaces) from the open side toward the recessed back side. ) Is narrowed in a front view (a view in the axial direction). As will be described later, by rotating the one-side rotation drive member 637, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation member 640 via the engagement of the engagement portion 637b and the engaged portion 641, and the rotation member 640 is transmitted. Can be rotated.

  The one-side rotation drive member 637 is formed with a connecting wall 637c that partially connects the opposing inner surfaces of the engaging portion 637b. The connecting wall 637c is formed in a shape that curves in an arc shape when viewed from the front (axial view) around the axis of the one-side rotation drive member 637, and at the open side (one-side rotation drive member 637) of the engaging portion 637b. Only the inner surfaces on the outer edge side) are connected to each other, and the inner surfaces on the back side of the recessed portion of the engaging portion 637b are not connected.

  Here, when the rotation member 640 is driven by the one-side rotation drive member 637, engagement and release of the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 are intermittently repeated (see FIG. 74). Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 starts to engage with the engaging portion 637b, an impact load is input, and the one-side rotation driving member 637 may be damaged. On the other hand, when the weight of the one side rotation drive member 637 increases, a large output is required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630.

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, since the connecting wall 637c is formed only on the open side of the engaging portion 637b, the reinforcement against the impact load when the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 start to be engaged. And weight reduction can be achieved effectively. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced while improving the durability of the one-side drive member 637.

  Returning to FIG. 43 from FIG. Each component of the drive mechanism 630 is disposed on the case member 610 except for the central transmission member 634 (see FIG. 53). On the other hand, the center transmission member 634 is rotatably held on the back side of the guide member 620. Here, a structure for holding the central transmission member 634 to the guide member 620 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 600 cut along a plane including the rotation axis of the central transmission member 634. As shown in FIG. 52, the center transmission body 634 is formed in a hat shape having a circular shape when viewed from the front and having a recessed central portion, and a gear 634a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the recessed portion at the center. A protruding portion 634b is formed to protrude in a flange shape outward in the radial direction from the portion.

  On the back side of the guide member 620, a pair of holding collars 623 and 624 (see FIG. 47 and FIG. 48) are overlapped at three positions that are equally spaced in the circumferential direction (that is, at positions that are 120 degrees apart). The protruding portion 634b of the central transmission member 634 is slidably inserted between the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 facing each other. Thereby, the center transmission member 634 can be rotatably held by the guide member 620 via the pair of holding collars 623 and 624.

  That is, the displacement of the central transmission member 634 in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 52) relative to the guide member 620 can be restricted by bringing the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the central transmission member 634. The displacement of the central transmission member 634 in the axial direction (left-right direction in FIG. 52) relative to the guide member 620 is restricted by bringing the protruding portion 634b of the central transmission member 634 into contact with the opposing surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624. it can.

  In this case, the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 are formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of the rotation axis of the central transmission member 634). Therefore, the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 and the outer peripheral surface of the central transmission member 634 can be in a circumscribed relationship (that is, in point contact) with each other. Thus, the frictional resistance when the central transmission member 634 rotates can be reduced. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Further, the structure in which the outer edge side (the overhanging portion 634b) of the central transmission member 634 is held in this manner allows the recessed portion at the center of the central transmission member 634 to be pivoted to the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610. There is no need to support the space, and a space for disposing the components for the shaft support becomes unnecessary. Therefore, a space for disposing the pitching device 650 to be described later can be secured.

  Next, the operation of the drive mechanism 630 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a front view of the case member 610 and the drive mechanism 630, and shows a state in which the central transmission member 634 is viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIG. 53, in the drive mechanism 630, a central transmission member 634 is disposed at a position concentric with the axis O, which is the rotation center of the rotation member 640, and the second transmission is transmitted to the gear 634a of the central transmission member 634. The gear 633b and the third distribution gears 635c and 636c are arranged in a meshed state. The third distribution gears 635c and 636c are disposed at positions where the phases are different by 180 degrees (that is, positions facing each other with the axis O interposed therebetween).

  Therefore, when the drive motor 631 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to the second transmission gear 633b via the pinion gear 632 and the first transmission gear 633a, and the center is accompanied by the rotation of the second transmission gear 633b. The transmission member 634 is rotated.

  When the central transmission member 634 is rotated, the pair of first distribution gears 635a and 636a are rotated in accordance with the rotation of the central transmission member 634, and the rotation is caused by the second distribution gears 635b and 636b and the third distribution gear. The gears 635c and 636c are transmitted to the gears 637a and 638a (see FIG. 48) of the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638, and the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638 rotate. Is done.

  Thus, since the central transmission gear 634 is engaged with the first distribution gear 635a and the second distribution gear 636a, the central transmission gear 634 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 631, so that the one-side rotational drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 can be rotated in a synchronized state. As a result, the driving of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  In this case, since the central transmission gear 634 is disposed concentrically with the axis O of the rotation member 640, the central transmission gear 634 and the one side and other side rotation drive members 637, 638 are viewed in the direction of the axis O. 2, the rotating member 640 can be disposed on the inner side (axial center O direction side) than the outer edge portion. That is, the central transmission gear 634 and the one-side and other-side rotation drive members 637 and 638 are not protruded outward from the outer shape of the rotation member 640, so that the size can be reduced accordingly.

  In the state where the guide member 620 is disposed on the case member 610, the engagement portions 637b of the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 are arranged radially outward from the outer edge portion of the guide member 620. 638b is exposed (see FIG. 49), and the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV of the rotating member 640 can be engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b. Therefore, by rotating the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation member 640 via the engagement of the engaging portions 637b and 638b and the engaged portion 641. Thus, the rotating member 640 can be rotated.

  In this case, the one side rotational drive member 637 and the other side rotational drive member 638 are disposed at positions that are different in phase by 180 degrees (that is, positions that face each other with the axis O interposed therebetween). Therefore, as will be described later, the position where the driving force is applied to the rotating member 640 (the engaging position) can be separated as much as possible, and the rotation of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  Further, the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638 are arranged in postures (rotational positions) in which phases of the engaging portion 637b and the engaging portion 638b are different from each other. That is, when one of the engaging portion 637b or the engaging portion 638b is not engaged with the engaged portion 641, the other of the engaging portion 637b or the engaging portion 638b is engaged with the engaged portion 641. (One and the other are prevented from being disengaged at the same time). Therefore, as will be described later, the transmission of the driving force from the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638 to the rotation member 640 can be suppressed, and the rotation of the rotation member 640 can be stabilized.

  Returning to FIG. 43 from FIG. As described above, the rotating member 640 is an annular member that is rotated by receiving the driving force of the rotating mechanism 630, and has a posture concentric with the central transmission member 634 and the guiding member 620. It is arrange | positioned at the front side. In the present embodiment, the rotating member 640 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front. Here, the rotating member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 60.

  54 (a) is a front view of the rotating member 640, and FIG. 54 (b) is a side view of the rotating member 640 as seen in the direction of the arrow LIVb in FIG. 54 (a). FIG. 55 is a rear view of the rotating member 640 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LV in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the rotating member 640 includes a plurality (30 in this embodiment) of divided members DV, and the plurality of divided members DV are connected endlessly along the circumferential direction. By this, it is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front.

  In this case, the plurality of divided members DV are formed such that the distance between the adjacent divided members DV can be changed. That is, the rotating member 640 includes a first section S1 in which the divided members DV are connected in the circumferential direction at a first interval, and a second interval in which the divided members DV are narrower than the first interval. The second section S2 connected in the circumferential direction is formed. In addition, between the 1st area S1 and 2nd area S2, the space | interval of the division members DV changes from the 1st space | interval in these 1st areas S1 to the 2nd space | interval (or the reverse) in 2nd area S2. A section to be formed is formed.

  FIG. 56 (a) is a front perspective view of the divided member DV, and FIG. 56 (b) is a rear perspective view of the divided member DV. FIG. 57 is an exploded front perspective view of the divided member DV, and FIG. 58 is an exploded rear perspective view of the divided member DV. 56 to 58, the connecting link member 644 of the adjacent divided member DV is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line in order to understand the connecting structure of the divided members DV.

  Here, in this embodiment, a part to be detected 641c is formed on a part (15 in this embodiment) of the plurality of divided members DV, while the remaining divided members DV The formation of the detected part 641c is omitted. The other parts of the divided member DV in which the detected part 641c is formed and the divided member DV in which the formation of the detected part 641c is omitted are the same except for the presence or absence of the detected part 641c. Therefore, in the following, the divided member DV where the detected portion 641c is formed will be described, and the description of the divided member DV where the formation of the detected portion 641c will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the divided member DV includes an engaged portion 641, a back side main body 642 in which the engaged portion 641 is disposed on the back side, and a front side of the back side main body 642. A front side main body 643 disposed on the front side, a connecting link member 644 whose base end is rotatably supported between the rear side main body 642 and the front side main body 643, and a front side of the front side main body 643. The plate holding member 645, the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 that are displaceably held by the plate holding member 645, and the front side main body 643 and the plate holding member 645 are slidably disposed. An undulating link member 648 is mainly provided.

  As described above, the engaged portion 641 is a portion that is engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the rotary drive members 637 and 638 of the drive mechanism 630, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle shape in front view. The rear side main body 642 is disposed in a posture protruding from the rear side on one side in the longitudinal direction (the lower side in FIG. 56B).

  On the attachment surface side of the engaged portion 641 to the back side main body 642, a facing portion 641a facing the back surface of the back side main body 642 with a predetermined interval is formed. The facing portion 641a and the back side body The outer edge portion of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the surfaces facing the 642. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the floating of the divided member DV (one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642) from the front of the guide member 620.

  In addition, a pair of sliding rollers 641b formed in a columnar shape are rotatably supported on the attachment surface side of the engaged portion 641 to the back side main body 642. The sliding roller 641b has its rotational axis orthogonal to the back surface of the back side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the divided member DV) and its outer peripheral surface can contact the outer peripheral surface of the outer edge portion of the guide member 620. Arranged in posture. Thereby, the sliding resistance when the division member DV is displaced along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, a plate-like detected portion 641c is formed on the opposite side of the surface of the engaged portion 641 that is attached to the back side main body 642. The detected portion 641c is a plate-like portion detected by the detection sensor 684 disposed on the guide member 680, and has a horizontal posture on the back surface of the back-side body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the divided member DV). The

  The back side main body 642 is a part that is placed on the front surface of the guide member 620 and slides on the front surface of the guide member 620 when the rotating member 640 rotates, and is formed in a rectangular plate shape in front view. In a state where the rotation member 640 is disposed on the guide member 620, the back side main body 642 is disposed in a posture in which the longitudinal direction thereof is along the radial direction of the guide member 620. That is, each back side main body 642 is arranged in a radial straight line centered on the axis O (see FIG. 54).

  The back-side main body 642 has a connecting link opening 642a and a undulating link opening 642b, which are groove-like openings extending linearly along the longitudinal direction, on the front side on one side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 57). A shaft support portion 642c that is formed and supports the base end side of the connecting link member 644 between the front side main body 643 (shaft support portion 643b) and a bent portion that protrudes from the back surface on the other side in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 58). 642d.

  The connection link opening 642a is an opening through which the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 of the adjacent division member DV is slidably inserted. By the insertion of the insertion portion 644a into the connection link opening 642a, the division member The DV can be connected to the adjacent divided member DV via the connecting link member 644. Further, the connecting link member 644 causes the tip of the insertion portion 644 a inserted through the connecting link opening 642 a to be inserted into the connecting link operation groove 621 of the guide member 620.

  The opening width of the connecting link opening 642a is set to a size that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644. Therefore, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link 644 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the connection link opening 642a.

  When the dividing member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, when the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 receives an action from the connection link operation groove 621 of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 644a is connected to the connection link opening 642a. , The posture of the connecting link member 644 can be allowed to change with the action from the connecting link action groove 621. As a result, the posture of the connecting link member 644 with respect to the back side main body 642 can be generated, and the interval between the divided members DV can be increased or decreased.

  The undulation link opening 642b is an opening through which the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link member 648 is slidably inserted. The undulation link member 648 guides the distal end of the insertion portion 648a inserted into the undulation link opening 642b as a guide member. The undulation link action groove 622 of 620 is inserted.

  The opening width of the undulating link opening 642b is set to a size that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link 648 can be slid (guided) along the extending direction of the undulation link opening 642b.

  When the dividing member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, when the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link member 648 is acted on by the undulation link action groove 622 of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 648a is moved to the undulation link opening 642b. The display board 646 and the partition board 647 can be undulated by being slid along.

  As described above, the shaft support portion 642c is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 (the lower side in FIG. 57), so that the base end side of the connecting link member 644 is viewed from the front side with the engaged portion 641. It can be pivotally supported at the overlapping position. Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 is driven by the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the rotation driving members 637 and 638, and the divided member DV is displaced along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the displacement is adjacent. It can be easily transmitted to the divided member DV to be transmitted through the connecting link member 644.

  The bent portion 642d protrudes from the back surface on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 (upper side in FIG. 58), and the protruding tip is opposed to the back surface of the back side main body 642 with a predetermined interval. The inner edge portion of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the facing surface of the rear-side main body 642 and the bent portion of the projecting tip. Thereby, the floating of the division member DV (the other side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642) from the front of the guide member 620 can be suppressed.

  Further, the bent portion 642d is disposed in such a posture that the base portion thereof can be brought into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the inner edge portion of the guide member 620, and the facing interval between the base portion of the bent portion 642d and the above-described sliding roller 641b is as follows. The guide member 620 is set to a size that is equal to or slightly larger than the radial width. Thereby, since the displacement of the dividing member DV in the radial direction of the guide member 620 can be regulated, the main body member DV (back side main body 642) is kept in a posture in which the longitudinal direction thereof is along the radial direction of the guide member 620. Thus, the guide member 620 can be displaced in the circumferential direction.

  The front-side main body 643 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape having a substantially the same size as the back-side main body 642, and is a undulation that is a groove-like opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction. A link slide groove 643a, and a shaft support portion 643b that is formed on the back surface on one side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 58) and supports the base end side of the connecting link member 644 between the back side main body 642 (the shaft support portion 642c). And a support plate 643c that protrudes from the front and supports the partition plate 647 in a rotatable manner.

  The undulating link slide groove 643a is a linear groove in which the undulating link member 648 is slidably disposed, and extends in parallel with the undulating link opening 642b. That is, the undulating link member 648 is slid along the undulating link slide groove 643a, thereby sliding the insertion portion 648a along the undulating link opening 642b.

  The back-side main body 642 and the front-side main body 643 have a width dimension on the other side in the longitudinal direction smaller than a width dimension on the one side in the longitudinal direction in a front view. In other words, the rotary member 640 is formed in a wedge shape in a front view in which the width dimension of the portion located on the inner circumference side is smaller than the width dimension of the portion located on the outer circumference side. Therefore, the 2nd space | interval in 2nd area S2 can be made smaller, the division member DV can be adjoined, and the space required for arrangement | positioning of the rotation member 640 can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, in the second section S2, the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 are in contact with the adjacent back side main body 642 and front side main body 643 in the circumferential direction (see FIGS. 54 and 73). .

  The connecting link member 644 is a long member, and the base end side thereof is rotatably supported by the shaft support portions 642c and 643b of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643, and a columnar insertion portion at the tip end side. 644a is formed. The insertion portion 644a protrudes in a posture parallel to the rotation axis of the connection link member 644, and, as described above, the connection link of the guide member 620 through the connection link opening 642a of the back side main body 642 in the adjacent divided member DV. The working groove 621 is inserted.

  The diameter of the insertion portion 644a is set to be approximately the same as or slightly smaller than the groove width of the connection link opening 642a and the connection link working groove 621. Therefore, during the rotation of the rotating member 640, the positional deviation of the divided member DV with respect to the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link 644 can be suppressed to the minimum, and the interval between the divided members DV can be easily maintained constant. Thereby, since the positional variation of the to-be-detected part 641c can be suppressed, the detection accuracy by the detection sensor 684 (see FIG. 71) can be improved.

  The base end side (that is, the shaft support portions 642c and 643b of the main bodies 642 and 643) that is rotatably supported by the rear side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 of the connection link member 644 is from the connection link opening 642a. Is also disposed at a position close to the engaged portion 641. In the present embodiment, the proximal end side of the connecting link member 644 is disposed at a position overlapping the engaged portion 641 in a front view (viewed in the direction of the axis O of the rotating member 640).

  As a result, the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the one-side and other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 are engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV, and the one-side and other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 are rotated. When the divided member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the displacement of the divided member DV can be easily transmitted to the adjacent divided member DV via the connecting link member 644. As a result, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  The undulating link member 648 is a member that is slidably held in the undulating link slide groove 643a of the front side main body 643. A cylindrical insertion portion 648a is formed on the back side, and an action groove 648b is formed on the front side. It is formed. The insertion portion 648a protrudes in a posture parallel to the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644, and as described above, the insertion portion 648a is formed in the undulation link working groove 622 of the guide member 620 through the undulation link opening 642b of the back side body 642. It is inserted.

  The action groove 648 b is a portion for acting on the actuated portion 646 d of the display plate 646 by sliding the undulating link member 648, and causing the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 to undulate. It is formed in a groove shape extending linearly along the sliding direction, and an actuated portion 646d of the display plate 646 is slidably inserted between the opposing surfaces of the groove portion.

  The display plate 646 includes a plate portion 646a formed in a rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, a shaft portion 646b and a connecting shaft 646c formed on one side of the plate portion 646a, and an opposition groove 648b of the undulating link member 648. And a plate-like part 646d inserted between the surfaces. Since the actuated portion 646d is formed by bending in a substantially S shape when viewed from the front, when the undulating link member 648 is slid, the actuated portion 646d is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement, The display plate 646 can be rotated with the shaft portion 646b as a rotation center.

  The partition plate 647 includes a plate-shaped plate portion 647a formed in a trapezoidal shape in front view, a pair of shaft portions 647b formed on one side of the plate portion 647a, and the same side as the pair of shaft portions 647b. And a shaft support portion 647c that is formed and rotatably supports the connecting shaft 646c of the display plate 646.

  Here, as described above, the rotation unit 600 is configured to simulate a roulette that rotates a wheel in which a plurality of pockets are continuously arranged in the circumferential direction and drops a pitched ball into one of the pockets. A space surrounded by the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 of the one divided member DV and the partition plate 647 of the adjacent divided member DV is defined as a pocket, and the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) has red Alternatively, a black color is added and different numbers (1 to 29) are displayed.

  In this embodiment, one display board 646 is given a green color and a predetermined mark (star shape) is displayed. Moreover, only the display board 646 located in 1st area S1 is visually recognized by the rotation member 640 from a player. That is, the display board 646 positioned in the second section S2 is shielded by other members disposed on the front side thereof, and cannot be viewed by the player.

  The plate holding member 645 includes a shaft support portion 645a that rotatably supports the shaft portion 646b of the display plate 646, and a shaft support portion 645b that rotatably supports the shaft portion 647b of the partition plate 647. The display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are rotatably supported on the upper surface side (front side) of the front side main body 643 by the shaft support by 645a and 645b.

  In this case, since the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are connected by the connection shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, the display plate 646 is rotated about the shaft portion 646b as the center of rotation as the undulating link member 648 slides. Then, the rotation is transmitted to the partition plate 647 via the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, and the partition plate 647 is rotated about the shaft portion 647b as a rotation center. The rotation of the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b) are a top perspective view and a bottom perspective view of the divided member DV in a state arranged in the first section S1, and FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b) It is the upper surface perspective view and lower surface perspective view of the division member DV in the state arrange | positioned in 2nd area S2. 59 and 60 show a state in which a part of the structure is seen through for easy understanding, and illustration of the connecting link member 644, the detected portion 641c, and the bent portion 642d is omitted. As shown in FIG. 59, in a state where the divided member DV is disposed in the first section S1, the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link member 648 is formed in the small diameter portion 622b (see FIG. 50) in the undulation link action groove 622 of the guide member 620. It is inserted. Therefore, the undulating link member 648 is slid and displaced to the other side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the inner peripheral side of the guide member 620 and the rotation member 640, the axis O side), Accordingly, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is arranged in a horizontal posture, while the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is arranged in an upright posture.

  The horizontal posture is a posture in which the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is parallel to the back surface of the back-side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the divided member DV), and the standing posture is the plate of the partition plate 647. The portion 647a is in a posture to be orthogonally parallel to the back surface of the back side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the divided member DV).

  As shown in FIG. 60, in a state where the divided member DV is disposed in the second section S2, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is a large diameter portion 622a in the undulating link working groove 622 of the guide member 620 (see FIG. 50). Is inserted. Therefore, the undulating link member 648 is slid and displaced to one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the outer peripheral side of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640, opposite to the axis O). Thus, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted from the horizontal posture toward the plate portion 647a side of the partition plate 647 and placed in an inclined posture, and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is moved from the standing posture. The display plate 646 is tilted toward the plate portion 646a and is disposed in an inclined posture.

  Thus, in this embodiment, since the display board 646 and the partition board 647 are connected by the connection shaft 646c and the shaft support part 647c, the display board 646 is rotated by the slide displacement of the undulating link member 648. The partition plate 647 can also be rotated through the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support 647c.

  Accordingly, it is not necessary to separately provide the undulation link action groove and the undulation link member for each of the mechanism for rotating the display plate 646 and the mechanism for rotating the partition plate 647. The link action groove and the undulating link member can be shared. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced, the structure can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Here, in this embodiment, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is heavier than the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647. Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 60 (that is, the state where the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted upward and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is tilted downward), the state shown in FIG. When the plate portion 646a of the plate 646 is set in a horizontal posture and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is set in a standing posture), the rotation action due to the weight of the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) is used. Thus, the state shown in FIG. 59 can be formed reliably and promptly.

  That is, since the plate portion 646a of the display board 646 is lifted upward, it can be rotated by its own weight in a direction tilted downward, thereby forming a horizontal posture and rotating the display board 646 (self-weight). Is transmitted to the partition plate 647 via the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, whereby the partition plate 647 can be lifted to form a standing posture. Therefore, even when rotation is hindered by adhesion of dirt or dust, the state shown in FIG. 59 can be formed reliably and promptly.

  In particular, in this embodiment, the display plate 646 is set such that the protruding length of the plate portion 646a from the shaft portion 646b is larger than the protruding length of the partition plate 647 from the shaft portion 647b of the plate portion 647a. Therefore, the center of gravity of the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 can be separated from the shaft portion 646b, and the center of gravity of the partition plate 647 can be brought close to the shaft portion 647b. As a result, the state shown in FIG. 59 is formed. Can be performed more reliably and promptly by utilizing the weight of the display board 646.

  Returning to FIG. 43 from FIG. The pitching device 650 is a device for pitching the ball B onto the rotating member 640, and is housed in a central recess in the central transmission member 634 of the drive mechanism 630 and disposed on the inner peripheral side of the rotating member 640. Here, the pitching device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 69.

  61 and 62 are exploded front perspective views of the pitching device 650. FIG. In FIG. 62, a state in which the holding piece protruding / retracting mechanism 670 is attached to the case body 651 is illustrated, and the passage member 655 is not illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the pitching device 650 includes a case body 651 formed in a container shape with the front side open, an arm rotation mechanism 660 and a holding piece protruding and retracting disposed inside the case body 651. It mainly includes a mechanism 670, a passage member 655 disposed on the front side of the case body 651, and a sphere B formed in a spherical shape from a translucent material.

  The case body 651 includes a bottom wall portion 651a that is substantially circular in front view, a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 651b that is erected from the bottom wall portion 651a toward the front, and a radially outer side from the outer peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b. A projecting wall portion 651c that projects in the form of a flange toward the end, and the projecting wall portion 651c is fastened and fixed to the back side of the guide member 620, whereby the standing end (opening portion) of the outer wall portion 651b. Is disposed at a position substantially matching the front surface of the rotating member 640 (the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646).

  A sphere holding portion 652 is disposed in front of the bottom wall portion 651a. In the sphere holding portion 652, a spherical recess having a size corresponding to the outer diameter of the sphere B is formed on the front surface, and the recess serves as a holding position (initial position) of the sphere B. That is, when the sphere B is disposed on the sphere holding portion 652, the sphere B is held between the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b and the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 (see FIG. 44).

  In this case, the pitching device 650 is arranged in a posture in which the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is positioned at the lowermost position, and when the arm member 664 of the arm rotating mechanism 660 is rotated, the ball B becomes the outer wall portion. The inner peripheral surface (inner peripheral passage 651c1) of 651b rolls and is held on the holding piece 677 at the protruding position of the holding piece protruding and retracting mechanism 670 (see FIG. 68). Here, the arm rotation mechanism 660 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65.

  FIG. 63 is an exploded front perspective view of the arm rotation mechanism 660. FIG. 64 is a front view of the pitching device 660 in a state where the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is disposed at the holding position, and FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 disposed at the separation position. It is a front view of the pitching device 660 in the state. 64 and 65 show a state where the front case 662 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is removed for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, the arm rotation mechanism 660 includes a rear case 661 disposed on the bottom wall portion 651a of the case body 651, a front case 662 disposed on the front surface of the rear case 661, A crank member 663 and an arm member 664 that are rotatably held between opposing surfaces of the rear case 661 and the front case 662, and a drive motor 665 and a pinion gear 666 for driving the crank member 663 and the arm member 664 are provided. .

  The rear case 661 is provided with shafts 661a and 661b projecting thereon, and a crank member 663 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661a and an arm member 664 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661b. A gear 663a with which the pinion gear 676 is engaged is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the crank member 663, and a pin portion 663b is provided at a position eccentric from the center of rotation (the shaft 661a). The arm member 664 is linearly provided with a slide groove 664a through which the pin portion 663b of the crank member 663 is slidably inserted, and has a rotational center (shaft 661b) with respect to the slide groove 664a. ), A curved portion 664b having a shape in front view obtained by dividing the annular shape in half is formed.

  Therefore, the drive motor 665 is rotationally driven in the forward direction or the reverse direction, the crank member 663 is rotated through the rotation of the pinion gear 666 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 655, and the pin portion 663b of the crank member 663 is moved. By acting on the sliding groove 664a of the arm member 664, the arm member 664 can be rotated in one direction or the other direction around the shaft 661b.

  That is, the arm member 664 has the holding position (see FIG. 64) for holding the sphere B on the sphere holding portion 652 with the bending shape of the bending portion 664b being aligned with the outer peripheral portion of the sphere holding portion 652, and holds the bending portion 664b on the sphere. It is possible to rotate (swing) between the separation position (see FIG. 65) where the sphere B is separated from the portion 652 and dropped from the sphere holding portion 652 to the inner peripheral passage 651c1.

  In the present embodiment, a part of the inner peripheral surface of the curved portion 664b (a range of a central angle of about 90 degrees on the side (downward side) separated from the shaft 661b) is formed by the cantilever plate 664c. The cantilever plate 664c is a plate-like body that is curved along the inner peripheral surface of the bending portion 664b. A shaft 664c1 provided on the base end side of the cantilever plate 664c is rotatably supported by the bending portion 664b, and the distal end side. Is maintained in a posture lifted upward (inward in the radial direction) by the elastic force of the leaf spring 667a of the limit switch 667 disposed on the back side (outer peripheral surface side).

  Therefore, in the state where the arm member 664 is disposed at the holding position, when the sphere B is held by the sphere holding portion 652, the cantilever plate 664c is pushed down around the shaft 664c1 by the weight of the sphere B, While the limit switch 667 is turned on, when the sphere B is not held by the sphere holding portion 652, the cantilever plate 664c is brought up as described above, and the limit switch 667 is turned off. As a result, the presence or absence of the sphere B in the sphere holder 652 can be detected.

  In this case, the curved portion 664b of the arm member 664 and the depression of the ball holding portion 652 are formed to have a size that allows the ball B to be displaced in a state where the arm member 664 is disposed at the holding position. That is, the inner diameter of the curved portion 664b and the inner diameter of the recess of the sphere holding portion 652 are made larger than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, when an external force (vibration) is input as the pachinko machine 10 is hit or shaken by the player, the ball B can be displaced in accordance with the input of the vibration. That is, when the ball B is displaced (vibrated), the cantilever plate 664c can be displaced along with the vibration, and the limit switch 667 can be turned on / off. As a result, by monitoring the state of the limit switch 667, the input of the external force to the pachinko machine 10 can be detected using the arm rotation mechanism 660.

  Returning to FIG. 61 and FIG. As described above, when the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is rotated to the separation position, the ball B is rolled on the inner peripheral surface (inner peripheral passage 651c1) of the outer wall portion 651b, and the holding piece protruding and retracting mechanism 670 is moved. It hold | maintains on the holding piece 677 in a protrusion position (refer FIG. 68). The holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is formed such that the holding piece 677 can be retracted between the protruding position and the retracted position. The retaining piece 677 is retracted into the retracted position, so that the ball B has a plurality of rotation members 640. Are thrown onto any one of the divided members DV (display plate 646). Here, the holding piece protruding and retracting mechanism 670 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 69.

  66 is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the protruding position, and FIG. 67 is a holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the retracted position. FIG.

  FIG. 68A is a front perspective view of the holding piece protruding and retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the protruding position, and FIG. 68B is a view taken along the line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. FIG. 69 (a) is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 69 (b) is an LXIXb-LXIXb line in FIG. 69 (a). It is a partial expanded sectional view of the holding | maintenance piece protrusion / extraction mechanism 670 in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, the holding piece protruding / retracting mechanism 670 is formed to be curved in an arc shape along the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b of the case body 651, and is disposed on the bottom wall portion 651a of the case body 651. A rear case 671, a front case 672 disposed in front of the rear case 671, a slide member 673 slidably held between opposing surfaces of the rear case 671 and the front case 672, and the slide member A driving motor 675 and a pinion gear 676 for driving 673, and a holding piece 677 which is projected and retracted with the sliding displacement of the sliding member 673.

  The back case 671 includes two sets of one pair of roller members 674 opposed to each other at a predetermined interval, and holds the slide member 673 so as to be slidable between the sets of roller members 674 facing each other. Further, the rear case 671 includes a sliding base 671a having a rectangular plate shape as viewed from above and extending from one end side (lower part) in the circumferential direction to the front side. The upper surface of the sliding base 671a and the front base 672 are provided. The slide displacement (protrusion to the front side and immersion to the back side) of the holding piece 677 is guided to the lower surface (outer peripheral surface) of the head.

  A pin portion 673a protrudes from one end side (lower portion) in the circumferential direction of the slide member 673, and a rack gear 673b meshed with the pinion gear 676 is formed on the inner peripheral surface at the other end side in the circumferential direction (information portion). Engraved along. In addition, a sliding groove 677a into which the pin portion 673a of the slide member 673 is slidably inserted is bent and extended in a substantially Z shape. That is, one end side (the right side in FIG. 66) of the sliding groove 677a is offset to the front side from the other end side (the left side in FIG. 66).

  Therefore, the drive motor 675 is rotationally driven in the forward direction or the reverse direction, and the pinion gear 676 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 675 is rotated, whereby the slide member 673 is slid and displaced through the rack gear 673b. By causing the pin portion 673a of the member 673 to act on the sliding groove 677a of the holding piece 677, the holding piece 677 can be protruded toward the front side or can be immersed into the back side. That is, the holding piece 677 is slidably displaceable between a protruding position where the holding piece 677 protrudes to the front side (see FIG. 68) and an immersion position where the holding piece 677 is immersed to the back side (see FIG. 69).

  Here, the upper surface of the holding piece 677 is located on the back side (the right side in FIGS. 68 (b) and 69 (b)) and the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b of the case body 651 (that is, the inner peripheral passage 651c1). A curved surface 677b that is concentrically curved and continuously communicates with the inner circumferential passage 651c1 in the circumferential direction, and is continuous with the edge of the curved surface 677b and toward the front side (left side in FIGS. 68 (b) and 69 (b)). Ascending inclined surface 677c which is inclined upward in accordance with this, and a descending inclined surface 677d which is continuous with the edge of the ascending inclined surface 677c and is inclined downward toward the front side are formed.

  Therefore, in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the protruding position (see FIGS. 68A and 68B), the holding piece 677 is dropped from the ball holding portion 652 and rolls on the inner peripheral passage 651c1 to bend the holding piece 677. The ball B reaching the surface 677b is restricted from rolling to the front side (left side in FIG. 68 (b)) by the rising inclination of the rising inclined surface 677c and held on the holding piece 677 (curved surface 677b). Can do.

  On the other hand, when the holding piece 677 is immersed from the protruding position to the back side and disposed at the immersed position (see FIGS. 69A and 69B), the front side of the front case 672 causes the back side (FIG. 69B). ) The ball B whose movement to the right side is regulated is moved over the rising inclined surface 677c and positioned on the falling inclined surface 677d as the holding piece 677 is displaced in the immersion direction (back side). Thereby, the sphere B can roll along the descending slope of the descending slope 677d, and the sphere B can be thrown onto the front side (the divided member DV of the rotating member 640).

  The curved surface 677b is smoothly connected to the inner peripheral passage 651c1 on both sides in the circumferential direction, so that the sphere B that has fallen from the ball holding portion 652 and rolled on the one inner peripheral passage 651c1 is bent by the holding piece 677. It can pass over the surface 677b and roll to the other inner peripheral passage 651c1. That is, the sphere B can be reciprocated between the inner circumferential passage 651c1 on the one circumferential side and the inner circumferential passage 651c1 on the other circumferential side via the curved surface 677b. Further, since the curved surface 677b of the holding piece 677 is located below the inner peripheral passage 651c1, when the ball B loses momentum and its rolling is converged, the ball B is positioned on the curved surface 677b. Can be made.

  Returning to FIG. As described above, the passage member 655 is disposed on the front side of the case body 651. The passage member 655 is located on the front side of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670, and the ball B thrown by the immersing operation (immersion to the immersing position) of the holding piece 677 is divided member DV (display) of the rotating member 640 And a return passage 655b serving as a passage for returning the ball B sent from the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 to the ball holding portion 652.

  The ball feeding passage 655a has a groove portion 655a1 having substantially the same width as the descending inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 and extending to the front side, and a front surface from the groove portion 655a1. The front portion 655a2 that is continuous with the side edge portion and that is substantially flush with the display plate 646 of the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, and the front portion 655a2 are erected from both sides in the width direction and the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 A pair of facing portions 655a3 facing each other at substantially the same spacing as the spacing between the partition plates 647 is provided.

  Therefore, when the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is inserted into the immersion position, the ball B rolled on the descending inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 is received by the groove portion 655a1 and the extending direction of the groove portion 655a1 is received. , The ball B can be thrown while suppressing rattling.

  Further, the front portion 655a2 is flush with the display plate 646 of the dividing member DV, and the opposing interval of the pair of opposing portions 655a3 is substantially the same as the opposing interval of the partition plate 647 of the dividing member DV. The formed sphere B can be smoothly arranged on the display plate 646 of the divided member DV. When the ball B is thrown, the rotation member 640 is stopped at a phase (rotation position) where the partition plate 647 of the divided member DV coincides with the facing portion 655a3 based on a detection result by a detection sensor 684 described later.

  The return passage 655b is provided on the downstream side of the rolling portion 655b1 as a rolling surface that rolls to the downstream side when the ball B sent from the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 is received on the upstream side, and on the downstream side of the rolling portion 655b1. And a standing portion 655b2 that is curved and formed so that the rolling direction of the sphere B is directed to the back side.

  In the front view of the pitching device 650, the rolling portion 655b1 is arranged on the inner peripheral side edge of the rotating member 640, and on the downstream side is arranged on the front side of the ball holding portion 652b. Further, the rolling portion 6551b1 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the upstream side toward the downstream side, and the downstream side is inclined downward toward the ball holding portion 652.

  A ball B placed on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 and conveyed in the circumferential direction along with the rotation of the rotating member 640 is radially inward by the action of the partition plate 647 and a return guide 681b of a guide member 680 described later. When the ball B is pushed out toward the upstream side of the return passage 655b, the ball B rolls down the rolling part 655b1 and is dropped to the ball holding part 652 while being guided by the standing part 655b2. The

  Returning to FIG. 43 from FIG. As described above, the guide member 680 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640. The guide member 680 is a member disposed along the lower portion of the rotating member 640, and guides the sphere B on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 at the time of conveyance accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 640 (that is, And a detection sensor 684 for detecting the phase (rotation position) of the rotation member 640. Here, the guide member 680 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71.

  70 is a front perspective view of the guide member 680, and FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the guide member 680. As shown in FIG. 70, the guide member 680 includes a base portion 681 disposed on the case member 610, a plate-shaped transmission plate 682 disposed on the front side of the base portion 681, and a rear side of the transmission plate 682. Are mainly provided with a cantilever plate 683 and a plurality (six in this embodiment) of detection sensors 684 disposed on the base portion 681.

  The base portion 681 is a member formed in a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape at a central angle of about 120 degrees (that is, a shape that curves in an arc shape when viewed from the front), and a guide surface 681a is formed on the inner peripheral surface side thereof. . The guide surface 681a is disposed on the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member 640 and faces the sphere B disposed on the divided member DV (that is, a space surrounded by the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647). That is, the ball B that is disposed on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 and is conveyed along with the rotation of the rotating member 640 is supported from below.

  Further, on the inner peripheral surface side of the base portion 681, a return guide 681b connected to the downstream side (right side in FIG. 70) of the guide surface 681a is formed. The return guide 681b is a portion for sending the ball B conveyed along with the rotation of the rotation member 640 to the return passage 655b of the passage member 655, and is formed with a width dimension smaller than that of the guide surface 681a and in the radial direction. By being formed in a shape protruding inward, it is arranged to face the divided member DV (display plate 646) of the rotating member 640 (see FIGS. 43 and 44).

  Therefore, when the ball B placed on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 is conveyed in the circumferential direction along with the rotation of the rotating member 640, the return guide is provided by the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647a) of the divided member DV. The ball B is pressed against the inner peripheral surface of 681b. Accordingly, when the rotating member 640 is further rotated, the ball B is pushed inward in the radial direction by the action of the partition plate 647 and the return guide 681b, and is conveyed to the upstream side of the return passage 655b.

  Here, even if the return guide 681b is omitted, if the rotating member 640 is rotated to the position where the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647a) is inclined downward toward the return passage 655b, the partition plate The sphere B can be dropped along the descending slope of 647 to the return passage 655b. However, in this case, since the sphere B is transported upward by the time the sphere B starts rolling by its own weight, the drop position when the sphere B is dropped becomes high, and the partition plate 647 Since the ball B is dropped after being rolled along the descending inclination, the momentum when the ball B is dropped is large. Therefore, there is a possibility that the return passage 655b is damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the return guide 681b is provided, so that the drop position when the ball B is dropped into the return passage 655b can be lowered, and the ball B slides on the return guide 681b. Since the ball is sent to the return passage 655b, the pitching speed can be reduced. As a result, damage to the return passage 655b can be suppressed.

  The transmission plate 682 is a part facing the divided member DV (display plate 646) of the rotating member 640 with a predetermined interval (interval capable of holding the sphere B), and a part of the upper edge side portion in the center in the width direction is a part. The passage member 655 extends upward to a position facing the ball-sending passage 655a (front portion 655a2). Thereby, it can suppress that the ball | bowl B pitched to the division member DV of the rotation member 640 from the pitching apparatus 650 jumps out outside.

  Further, the transmission plate 682 is not only the divided member DV on which the ball B is thrown (that is, the divided member DV having the same phase as the front surface portion 655a2 of the ball feeding passage 655a), but also the downstream side of the divided member DV (of the ball B). Since the split member DV adjacent to the downstream side in the transport direction is also formed with a size (width dimension) that can partially face each other, the violence of the ball B thrown from the pitching passage 655 a The sphere B can be easily transported to the return guide 681b.

  On the other hand, the transmission plate 682 has a size (width dimension) that allows the divided member DV to which the ball B is thrown and the divided member DV adjacent to the downstream side of the divided member DV to face each other, and the divided member DV to be thrown. And it does not face with respect to the division member DV located in the downstream rather than the adjacent division member DV. That is, the ball B can be exposed between the edge of the transmission plate 682 on the downstream side in the conveyance direction of the ball B (right side in FIG. 70) and the return guide 681b, and the player can visually recognize the conveyance of the ball B. Easy to do.

  Since the entire transmission plate 682 is made of a light-transmitting material, the player can see through the member and the ball B located on the back side. Therefore, the pitched ball B passes through the pitching passage 655a and falls between the display plate 647 and the transmission plate 682 of the divided member DV, and is supported by the guide surface 681a by the rotation of the rotating member 640. The player can visually recognize a series of modes to be conveyed.

  The cantilever plate 683 is a member that forms the inner peripheral surface of the base portion 681 together with the guide surface 681a, and is formed as a plate-like body that curves along the guide surface 681a (that is, the inner peripheral surface of the base portion 681). The cantilever plate 683 has one end in the circumferential direction pivotally supported on the base 681 by a shaft 685, and the other end in the circumferential direction is supported by the elastic force of a leaf spring of a limit switch (not shown) disposed on the base 681. The posture is lifted upward (inward in the radial direction).

  In a posture in which the other circumferential end of the cantilever plate 683 is lifted upward, the limit switch is turned off. When the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 to the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, the ball B The cantilever plate 683 is pushed down with the shaft 685 as the center of rotation due to the weight, and the limit switch is turned on. Thereby, it can be detected that the ball B thrown from the pitching device 650 is arranged at an appropriate position (the divided member DV of the rotating member 640).

  On the other hand, when the sphere B is conveyed with the rotation of the rotating member 640 and the weight of the sphere B acting on the cantilever plate 683 is less than or equal to a predetermined value, the cantilever plate 683 is lifted as described above. Return to, and turn off the limit switch.

  The detection sensor 684 is a sensor device for detecting the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640, and is formed as a non-contact sensor in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are arranged to face each other, and its detection region (light emitting unit and light receiving unit). Are disposed on the movement locus of the detected portion 641c of the divided member DV in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54), and are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. Note that the interval between the detection sensors 684 is set to be the same as the interval (first interval) between the divided members DV (detected portions 641c) in the first section S1.

  Therefore, a plurality (six in this embodiment) of divided members DV adjacent in the circumferential direction can be arranged at positions corresponding to the detection sensors 684, respectively, and the rotating member 640 corresponds to a predetermined amount (that is, corresponding to the first interval). The divided member DV detected by each detection sensor 684 can be shifted in the circumferential direction each time it is rotated by the amount of rotation).

  In this case, as described above, the part to be detected 641c is formed on a part (15 in this embodiment) of the plurality of divided members DV, while the remaining divided members DV The formation of the detected part 641c is omitted. Therefore, in the detection sensor 684 in which the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed is disposed, the light received by the light receiving portion of the light emitted from the light emitting portion is blocked by the detected portion 641c, and the detection signal is turned off. The detection sensor 684 in which the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is not formed can receive light emitted from the light emitting portion by the light receiving portion, and the detection signal is turned on (see FIG. 76). As a result, as will be described later, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be detected based on the combination of detection results of the detection sensors 684.

  In the present embodiment, two detection results (on / off) based on the presence / absence of the detected portion 641c of the divided member DV are respectively performed by the six detection sensors 684, so 64 (= 2 to the sixth power). Street combinations can be formed. In this case, since the number of divided members DV is 30, the detection sensor 684 detects which divided member DV of the plurality of divided members DV is located at the reference position, as will be described later. It can always be determined based on the result.

  Next, the operation of the rotation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 77. First, an operation of changing the interval between the divided members DV when the rotating member 640 is rotated will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73.

  FIG. 72 is a front view of the guide member 620 and the rotation member 640. 73A is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member 620 and the rotation member 640 in the first section S1, and FIG. 73B is a portion of the guide member 620 and the rotation member 640 in the second section S2. It is an enlarged front view.

  In order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, FIGS. 72 and 73 show only the back-side main body 642, the connecting link member 644, and the undulating link member 648 among the components of the divided member DV. In addition, FIG. 73 illustrates a state where the connecting link working groove 621 and the undulating link working groove 622 are hatched.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the rotation member 640 is a member formed to be rotatable about the axis O (that is, along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620), and includes a plurality of divided members DV. Are endlessly connected in the circumferential direction. That is, each divided member DV is rotatably supported at the base end side of the connecting link member 644 by the rear side main body 642, while the insertion portion 644a on the distal end side of the connecting link member 644 is adjacent to the rear side of the divided member DV. The connection link action groove 621 is inserted through the connection link opening 642 a in the main body 642.

  As described above, the back side main body 642 of the divided member DV has the sliding roller 641b on one side in the longitudinal direction and the bent portion 642 on the other side in the longitudinal direction abutting on the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the guide member 620. When the guide member 620 is moved in the circumferential direction, the attitude with respect to the guide member 620 is such that the axis O is positioned on the longitudinal extension of the back side main body 642 (that is, the axis O is radiated around the axis O). Maintained in a straight posture). That is, only movement while maintaining the posture is allowed.

  In this case, since the large-diameter portion 621a of the connection link action groove 621 is formed at a position closer to the base end side (side rotatably supported) of the connection link member 644 than the small-diameter portion 621b, such a connection link. In a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the large diameter portion 621a of the action groove 621 (see FIG. 73A), the connection link member 644 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642. As a result, the back side main bodies 642 can be separated from each other. That is, the interval between the divided members DV (rear body 642) in the first section S1 can be a large interval (first interval).

  On the other hand, the small-diameter portion 621b of the connection link operation groove 621 is formed at a position farther from the base end side (side rotatably supported) of the connection link member 644 than the large-diameter portion 621a. In a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the small diameter portion 621b of the groove 621 (see FIG. 73 (b)), the rear surface of the connection link member 644 is oriented along the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642. The side main bodies 642 can be brought close to each other. That is, the interval between the divided members DV (rear body 642) in the second section S2 can be set to a small interval (second interval).

  Here, as described above, the rotation member 640 is an effect device that is formed to simulate a roulette, and identification information such as numbers and marks is displayed on the display board 646 (plate part 646a). That is, the presentation is performed by making the player visually recognize the identification information displayed on the display board 646. Therefore, in consideration of the player's visibility, the display board 646 (display of identification information) is preferably large, and in order to secure variations in the effect, the number of display boards 646 (of the identification information) It is preferable that there are many types).

  In this case, in consideration of the player's visibility, the display of the identification information (that is, the plate portion 646a of the display board 646) needs to have a certain size or more, and the size is maintained. However, when the number of identification information displayed (the number of display plates 646) is increased, the diameter of the rotating member 640 increases, so that the rotating member 640 does not fit in a predetermined arrangement space, while the rotating member 640 is adjusted to fit in the predetermined space. When the diameter is reduced, the number of identification information displayed (the number of display plates 646) decreases, and it becomes impossible to ensure variations in effect.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first section S1 in which the dividing member DV is connected in the circumferential direction at the first interval, and the first interval S1 that is narrower than the first interval in the first interval S1. As described above, the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) positioned in the first section S1 can be formed in the rotating member 640 while being able to form the second section S2 in which the divided members DV are connected in the circumferential direction at intervals of 2. The player visually recognizes the display board 646 located in the second section S2 by other members.

  Therefore, compared with the case where the plurality of divided members DV are all connected at the first interval, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be shortened, and the space necessary for disposing the rotating member 640 can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to increase the number of identification information displayed (the number of display plates 646) while ensuring a certain size or more of display of identification information (that is, display plate 646). As a result, it becomes impossible to ensure the player's visibility and variation of the effect.

  Here, as described above, in the first section S1, the divided member DV is arranged in a horizontal posture (a posture parallel to the moving plane of the divided member DV) in the display plate 646. The identification information displayed on 646 can be easily seen by the player.

  On the other hand, as described above, in the second section S2, the divided member DV is in a posture in which the plate portion 646a of the display board 646 is lifted up from the horizontal posture in the first section S1. Interference with DV can be suppressed, and the divided members DV can be brought closer to each other accordingly. That is, the interval (second interval) between the divided members DV in the second section S2 can be reduced. As a result, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be shortened, and the space required for the arrangement can be suppressed.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is disposed on the upper surface of the front-side main body 643 so as to be able to be displaced (rotated). The upper surface of the member 645) can be lifted upward (that is, a position where it does not interfere) (see FIG. 54). Therefore, the divided member DV can be brought close to a position where the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 are in contact with each other. That is, the 2nd space | interval in 2nd area S2 can be made narrower. As a result, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be shortened, and the space necessary for arranging the rotating member can be suppressed.

  Next, the driving operation of the rotating member 640 by the driving mechanism 630 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d) are state transition diagrams each time the one-side rotation driving member 637 is rotated by 30 degrees, and the one-side rotation driving member 637 viewed from the front is illustrated.

  74 (b), 74 (c), and 74 (d) correspond to the states rotated 30 degrees, 60 degrees, and 90 degrees from FIG. 74 (a), respectively. 74 (a) to 74 (d), the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV is illustrated in a cross-sectional view, and the movement locus of the engaged portion 641 indicates a two-dot chain line. Used to illustrate.

  Here, as described above, the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638 are formed in the same shape. In the driving operation of the rotating member 640 by these, the same driving operation will be described only for the driving operation by the one side rotating driving member 637, and the description of the driving operation by the other side rotating driving member 638 will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d), the one-side rotational drive member 637 has a movement locus of the engaging portion 637b partially in relation to a movement locus of the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. It arrange | positions in the position which overlaps and it can be rotated in the state which made the engaging part 637b engage with the to-be-engaged part 641 in the overlapping part. Note that the circular movement locus of the engaging portion 637b is an inscribed circle having a smaller diameter than the circular movement locus of the engaged portion 641.

  When the one-side rotation driving member 637 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 53), the rotation is transmitted to the divided member DV through the engagement of the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641. Then, the divided member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the movement is transmitted to the adjacent divided member DV via each connecting link member 644, whereby the rotating member 640 is rotated. Rotated in the direction.

  In this case, as described above, the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 (see FIGS. 57 and 58). That is, the engaged portion 641 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640 formed in an annular shape. Therefore, the rotation amount of the rotation member 640 relative to the unit rotation amount of the one side rotation drive member 637 can be reduced (the rotation amount of the one side rotation drive member 637 required to rotate the rotation member 640 by the unit rotation amount can be increased). ). Accordingly, the apparent reduction ratio can be reduced accordingly. In other words, since the driving force is applied to a position far from the axis O of the rotating member 640, the rotational torque applied to the rotating member 640 can be increased. As a result, the rotational driving of the rotating member 640 (especially rotational driving from the stopped state) can be stabilized, and the output required for the driving motor 631 of the driving mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Here, the drive mechanism 630 includes a one-side rotation drive member 637 and another-side rotation drive member 638, which are disposed at different positions along the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 53). The driving force applied from the mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 can be dispersed at different positions in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640, and application of the driving force to a part of the plurality of divided members DV can be suppressed. That is, even when the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting a plurality of divided members DV endlessly in the circumferential direction as described above, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are disposed at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase in the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 53). The driving force from each of the rotation driving members 637 and 638 can be applied to the two most spaced apart members of the rotating member 640 (the plurality of divided members DV), and as a result, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 is changed. Can be stabilized.

  In this case, in the state of the divided member DV, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 that is pivotally supported by the divided member DV is first inserted through the large diameter portion 621a in the connecting link working groove 621 of the guide member 620. , A second state inserted through the small-diameter portion 621b, and a third state inserted through the connection portion 621c, in the present embodiment, the one-side rotational drive member 637 and the other side The rotational driving member 638 can apply a driving force to the divided member DV in the third state (that is, the engaging portions 637b and 638b can be engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV in the third state). ).

  Accordingly, it is possible to apply a driving force to the divided member DV that is in a state in which the interval between the adjacent divided members DV is changed from the first interval to the second interval (or vice versa). Since the divided member DV receives a relatively large reaction force from the connection portion 621c, the rotation of the entire rotating member 640 in which the plurality of divided members DV are connected endlessly (movement of each divided member DV in the circumferential direction) is performed. The divided member DV that receives a relatively large reaction force from the connection portion 621c is directly driven by the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638, so that the plurality of divided members DV are endless. It is possible to stably displace (rotate) the entire rotating member 640 connected to the.

  Note that the period during which the driving force is transmitted from the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638 to the divided member DV completely coincides with the period in which the divided member DV is in the above-described third state. It is not necessary, and it is sufficient if the period during which the former driving force is transmitted and the period in the latter third state overlap at least partially.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link working groove 621 and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link working groove 622 are formed at different phases. That is, when the divided member DV is in the third state described above, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 disposed in the divided member DV is formed in the large diameter portion 622a or the small diameter portion 622b of the undulating link working groove 622. It is inserted.

  Therefore, when the dividing member DV is moved in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 supported by the dividing member DV passes through the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link working groove 621. Thereafter, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 passes through the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link working groove 622 (or vice versa).

  Accordingly, the reaction force is not received from both the connection portion 621c of the connection link action groove 621 and the connection portion 622c of the undulation link action groove 622 at the same time, and the timing of receiving the reaction force can be varied. As a result, the required driving force can be dispersed, and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced accordingly.

  Here, since the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 are arranged with their phases (rotation positions of the engaging portions 637b and 638b) different from each other, the displacement (rotation) of the rotation member 640 is performed. Can be stabilized. Here, the phase relationship between the one side rotational drive member 637 and the other side rotational drive member 638 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 75 is a state relationship diagram showing the relationship between the phase of engagement or release of the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 with respect to the divided member DV. In FIG. 75, the upper state diagram corresponds to the one side rotation drive member 637, and the lower state diagram corresponds to the other side rotation drive member 638. In FIG. 75, the horizontal axis indicates the phase, and the vertical axis indicates the engaged or released state.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 75, the first engaging portion 637b among the engaging portions 637b formed at the three positions of the one-side rotation driving member 637 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. If the phase at the time of starting the rotation is defined as 0 ° (reference position), the one-side rotary drive member 637 is in the first position until the phase reaches approximately 100 ° (that is, until it rotates 100 ° from the reference position). One engaging portion 637b is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV, and the driving force is transmitted to the divided member DV. On the other hand, when the phase is approximately 100 ° to 120 °, the engagement is released. Thus, the transmission of the driving force to the split member DV is released.

  Thereafter, the second engaging portion 637b and the third engaging portion 637b among the engaging portions 637b formed at three positions of the one-side rotation driving member 637 are the first engaging portion 637b. The same engagement and disengagement state (that is, engagement at a rotation angle of approximately 100 ° and release at a rotation angle of approximately 20 °) is repeated.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 75, with respect to the other-side rotation drive member 638, the engagement portions 638b formed at the three locations are respectively engaged and released in the same manner as in the case of the one-side rotation drive member 637 described above. (That is, the engagement between the rotation angles of about 100 ° and the release between the rotation angles of about 20 °) are repeated.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, as described above, the one side rotational drive member 637 and the other side rotational drive member 638 are arranged with different phases (the rotational positions of the engaging portions 637b and 638b). The In other words, the other side rotational drive member 638 has a phase in which the first engagement portion 638b of the engagement portions 638b formed at the three positions starts to engage with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. The phase is set approximately 40 ° behind the phase (reference position) at which the first engagement portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 starts engagement.

  As a result, one side of the one side rotation drive member 637 or the other side rotation drive member 638 is on the one side while the engagement with the divided member DV is released (that is, transmission of the driving force is released). The phases (rotational positions) of the engaging portions 637b and 638b are set such that the other of the rotation driving member 637 or the other side rotation driving member 638 is engaged with the divided member DV. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid the state in which the engagement with the divided member DV is released at the same time in both the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638. As a result, the transmission of the driving force from the driving mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 is suppressed from being intermittent, and the displacement of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  That is, as described above, in the configuration in which the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members DV endlessly, when transmission of the driving force from the driving mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 becomes intermittent, Due to the transmission and release of the driving force, the interval between the divided members DV is easily increased or decreased. Therefore, the posture of the rotating member 640 as a whole becomes unstable, and its displacement (rotation) becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, even if one of the one side rotation driving member 637 or the other side rotation driving member 638 is in the released state, the other is engaged, and the driving force is applied to the rotation member 640. Can be formed, so that the interval between the divided members DV can be easily maintained. As a result, the posture of the rotating member 640 formed by connecting the plurality of divided members DV endlessly can be stabilized, and the displacement (rotation) can be stabilized.

  Next, the operation for detecting the rotational position of the rotating member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 76 is a state transition diagram for each rotation amount of the rotating member 640, and shows a state in which the arrangement of the detection sensor 684 and the divided member DV is developed on a straight line.

  In FIG. 76, for convenience of explanation, reference numerals “A to F” are shown for the detection sensor 684, and reference numerals “1 to 10, 30” are shown for the divided member DV. The detection state is illustrated by the sign “ON, OFF”. In FIG. 76, the detected portion 641c is hatched for easy understanding.

  Here, in the description of FIG. 76, each of the detection sensors 684 is replaced with a detection sensor A, a detection sensor B,... Using the reference numerals “A to F” “1 to 10, 30” attached in the drawing. The divided members DV are referred to as a first divided member DV, a second divided member DV,..., A 30th divided member DV, and are distinguished from each other.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (a), when the rotating member 640 is rotated and the first divided member DV reaches a phase (rotational position) that can be detected by the detection sensor A, the second divided member DV starts to the sixth divided member DV. The divided members DV are arranged in phases that can be detected by the detection sensors B to F, respectively.

  Therefore, in the detection sensors A and C to F, the light received by the light receiving part of the light emitted from the light emitting part is blocked by the detected parts 641c of the first divided member DV and the third to sixth divided members DV. Thus, while the detection state is turned off, in the detection sensor B, the light received from the light emitting unit can be received by the light receiving unit, and the detection state is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (b), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by the unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76 (a), the divided member DV is moved in the circumferential direction (FIG. 76 (a) and FIG. 76 (b)). The divided member DV that is the detection target of each of the detection sensors A to F is changed (shifted by one). Therefore, in the detection sensors B to E, the detection state is turned off by the light shielding of the third to seventh divided members DV (detected portion 641c), while in the detection sensors A and F, the detection state is turned on. The

  As shown in FIG. 76 (c), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by the unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76 (b), the divided members DV to be detected by the detection sensors A to F are changed ( In the detection sensors A to D and F, the detection state is turned off by the light shielding of the third to sixth divided members DV and the eighth divided member DV (detected portion 641c). In the sensor E, the detection state is turned on.

  Thereafter, each time the rotating member 640 is rotated by the unit rotation amount, the divided member DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F is changed (shifted by one), and this is changed to the number of divided members DV (this embodiment). If the number of repetitions is 30 (that is, 30 in the embodiment) (that is, the rotating member 640 is rotated once), the state shown in FIG.

  In this case, as described above, there are two types of rotating member 640, one in which the detected portion 641c is formed and one in which the formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. By connecting these two types of divided members DV in the circumferential direction, the detected portions 641c are arranged in a predetermined manner at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The predetermined arrangement means a combination of presence / absence of the detected portion 641c (that is, the detection sensor A) even if any six adjacent divided members DV are extracted from the 30 divided members DV connected in the circumferential direction. The detection state of -F) means the arrangement | sequence from which all differ.

  Therefore, a table of such a combination (a table in which the detection states of the detection sensors A to F are associated with the divided member DV to be detected at the time of detection) is created in advance and stored in the ROM, thereby detecting the sensor. The phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be grasped by referring to the table every time A to F performs detection. That is, it is possible to determine which divided member DV of the plurality (30 in this embodiment) of divided members DV is located at the reference position.

  Here, the rotation member 640 is provided with a slit continuous in the circumferential direction, and the slit is detected by the detection sensor 684, and the number of pulses of the pulse-like signal is cumulatively added. The rotation amount (phase) of the rotating member 640 from the reference position can also be detected. However, in this case, if a detection failure such as a light reception failure of the light receiving unit of the detection sensor 684 occurs, a deviation occurs between the amount of rotation of the rotating member 640 and the cumulative number of pulses, and the phase of the rotating member 640 is accurately determined. Can no longer be detected. That is, when a detection failure occurs even once, it affects the subsequent detection results, and every time a detection failure occurs, the influence on the detection results is accumulated.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the plurality of detected portions 641c arranged at unequal intervals (predetermined arrangement) along the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640 and the movement of the plurality of detected portions 641c. Since the plurality of detection sensors 684 (detection sensors A to F) arranged on the locus are provided, the phase (rotation position) of the rotation member 640 is detected based on the combination of detection results of the detection sensors A to F. be able to. That is, the phase of the rotating member 640 can be detected based only on the current detection result detected by the detection sensors A to F, and the past of the detection sensors A to F can be used to detect the phase of the rotating member 640. Therefore, even if a detection failure has occurred in the past, it is not affected by the detection failure, and the phase of the rotating member 640 can be detected accurately.

  As described above, the interval between the detection sensors A to F is set to be the same as the interval (first interval) between the divided members DV (detected portions 641c) in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54).

  Therefore, each time the rotation member 640 is rotated by a rotation angle corresponding to the interval between the divided members DV, the combinations of detection results of the detection sensors A to F can be made different. That is, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be detected with the rotation angle corresponding to the interval between the divided members DV in the first section S1 as the minimum unit. As a result, the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 to any divided member DV (that is, any pocket of the rotating member 640 simulating roulette) among the plurality of divided members DV coupled in the circumferential direction. be able to.

  Further, in this way, the arrangement interval of the detection sensors A to F is set with reference to the interval of the divided members DV in the first section S1 (that is, the detection sensors A to F are divided members DV in the first section S1). The space required for the arrangement of the detection sensors A to F is compared with the case where the interval of the divided members DV in the second section S2 is used as a reference. Can be easily secured, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

  In other words, when the detection sensors A to F are arranged at positions where the detected part 641c of the divided member DV can be detected in the second section S2, a space for arranging these detection sensors A to F is secured. Therefore, there is a limit to narrowing the interval (second interval) between the divided members DV. On the other hand, since the detection sensors A to F are arranged on the first section S1 side, the setting of the interval (second interval) between the divided members DV in the second section S2 is not limited, and the first The space | interval of 2 can be made into a narrower space | interval. As a result, the space required for the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be suppressed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, two detection results (on / off) based on the presence / absence of the detected portion 641c of the divided member DV are respectively performed by the six detection sensors 684, so that 64 (= 2 6) combinations can be formed.

  In this case, since the number of the divided members DV is 30, the number of the five detection sensors 684 is sufficient (that is, 32 (= 2 to the 5th power) combinations can be formed). However, in this case, a state occurs in which all the detection results of the five detection sensors 684 are turned off (not shielded by the detected portion 641c), and therefore in a predetermined phase (rotational position) corresponding to the state. The timing for acquiring the detection result of the detection sensor 684 cannot be obtained.

  On the other hand, by using six detection sensors 684 as in the present embodiment, the detection results of all the six detection sensors 684 are off (the state in which the detection part 641c is not shielded from light). ) Can be avoided. That is, in at least one detection sensor 684 out of the six detection sensors 684, the detection result can be turned on (shielded by the detected portion 641), so that all phases (rotations) Position), the timing for obtaining the detection result of the detection sensor 684 can be obtained.

  FIG. 77 is a partially enlarged side view in which a portion in the first section S1 of the rotating member 640 is enlarged. As shown in FIG. 77, in the first section S1, the display plate 646 of the divided member DV has the plate portion 646a arranged in a horizontal posture and the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a (FIGS. 57 and 58). The side surface (the left side in FIG. 77) opposite to the reference) faces the side surface of the plate holding member 645 of the adjacent divided member DV.

  In the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is formed such that the side surface of the plate portion 646a opposite to the shaft portion 646b is curved in an arc shape (see an enlarged portion in FIG. 77). Therefore, when the plate portion 646a is rotated about the shaft portion 646b and arranged in a horizontal posture, the display plate 646 has a plate holding member 645 of the adjacent divided member DV on the side opposite to the shaft portion 646b. Can be suppressed, and as a result, the distance between the opposite side (arc-shaped side surface) of the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a and the side surface of the plate holding member 645 can be narrowed.

  As a result, in the first section S1, when the divided member DV and the adjacent divided member DV try to be relatively displaced in the direction of narrowing the interval (first interval) between them, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 Such a relative displacement can be regulated by the side surface being in contact with the side surface of the plate holding member 645. Therefore, it can suppress that the to-be-detected part 641c of these division member DV shifts in the direction which narrows those intervals, As a result, the improvement of the detection accuracy by the detection sensor 684 can be aimed at.

  On the other hand, in the first section S1, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is connected to the end of the connecting link opening 642a in the rear side main body 642 of the adjacent divided member DV (the end on one side in the extending direction, FIG. ) (Below) (see FIG. 73 (a)), when the divided member DV and the adjacent divided member DV try to be relatively displaced in the direction of widening their interval (first interval), The phase displacement can be regulated by the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 being in contact with the terminal end of the connection link opening 642a. Therefore, it can suppress that the to-be-detected part 641c of these division member DV shifts in the direction which widens those intervals, As a result, the improvement of the detection accuracy by the detection sensor 684 can be aimed at.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 83. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the tip of the first passage forming member 520 is always opened has been described. However, the left swing unit 2500 in the second embodiment is disposed at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. The tip wall member 2560 for opening and closing the passage is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 78 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit 2500 in the second embodiment. 78 shows a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the left swinging unit 2500 includes a base member 2510 that discharges the sphere to the right rear side of the first wall 513, the extending direction of the sorting base member 2521, and the long holes 2521d. A first passage forming member 2520 whose extending direction is substantially straight and a tip wall member 2560 for opening and closing the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 are mainly provided.

  The base member 2510 includes a side flow down passage 2515 that extends rearward from the right side of the guide wall portion 513a. In addition, although the external shape of the introduction cylinder part 552 differs from the external shape of the introduction cylinder part 552 in 1st Embodiment, since the technical idea is the same, description is abbreviate | omitted in this embodiment.

  The side flow down passage 2515 is a passage that discharges the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position.

  The first passage forming member 2520 includes a sorting base member 2521 and a passage cover member 2522. The sorting base member 2521 has a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 2521a that constitutes one side of the sphere flow-down passage, a long hole 2521d that extends along the extending direction of the hanging plate portion 2521a, and a gap V1. The second distribution convex portion 2521g disposed opposite to the distribution convex portion 521e on the right side of the front view of FIG. 5 and the rear side toward the front side of the hanging plate portion on the right side of the second distribution convex portion 2521g in the front view And a discharge recess 2521h that is recessed from the side surface.

  The hanging plate portion 2521a has a recessed portion 2521a2 in which a portion of the lower wall surface facing the passage cover member 2522 (left side in FIG. 78) is cut and recessed at the lower end portion, and a passage cover member at the lower end portion. A shaft support hole 2521a3 that is formed in a circular shape in a direction opposite to the passage cover member is provided on the opposite side to 2522.

  The recessed portion 2521a2 is a recessed portion that forms an opening on the lower surface of the first passage forming member 2520 in cooperation with the recessed portion 2522b1 of the passage cover member 2522. The distal end wall member 2560 passes through the opening formed by the recessed portion 2521a by a rotating operation.

  The shaft support hole 2521a3 is a hole in which the main body portion 2561a of the tip wall member 2560 is supported by a pin member on a rod, and is disposed at a position (coaxial position) corresponding to the shaft support hole 2522a2 of the passage cover member 2522. The

  The 2nd distribution convex part 2521g is a part comprised by the substantially same shape as the distribution convex part 521e, Comprising: The part which distribute | arranged the ball | bowl which reached | attained the 1st wall part 513 to right and left. The discharge concave portion 2521h is disposed with a space larger than the diameter of the sphere between the first wall portion 513 and reaches the first wall portion 513 to the right side of the second distribution convex portion 2521g in front view. The distributed balls are introduced from the discharge recess 2521h into the side flow down passage 2515 and then discharged out of the game area.

  The passage cover member 2522 has a plate-like plate-like portion 2522a that covers the front side of the distribution base member 2521, and extends in a plate-like shape from both ends in the short-side direction of the plate-like portion 2522a toward the back side. The upper and lower wall portions 2522b are mainly provided.

  The plate-like portion 2522a includes the ball receiving portion 522a1 described above in the first embodiment, and a shaft support hole 2522a2 that is formed in a circular shape coaxially with the shaft support hole 2521a3 of the sorting base member 2521 at the lower end portion. Prepare. The shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 are holes that rotatably support the tip wall member 2560.

  The upper and lower wall portions 2522b are provided with a recessed portion 2522b1 which is recessed at a position facing the recessed portion 2521a2 and forms an opening through which a sphere can pass in cooperation with the recessed portion 2521a2.

  The distal end wall member 2560 is disposed between the sorting base member 2521 and the passage cover member 2522 at the distal end portion of the first passage forming member 2520 and rotates into a rod-like pin member coaxially with the shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2. A main body member 2561 having a substantially Z-shape in front view that is pivotally supported and a torsion spring 2562 that urges the main body member 2561 clockwise in front view is mainly provided.

  The torsion spring 2562 is configured in such a manner that one arm is fixed to the distal end of the passage cover member 2522 and the other arm abuts on a locking pin 2561e protruding from the distal end wall member 2560 on the back side.

  With reference to FIG. 79, the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560 will be described. 79 (a) and 79 (d) are front views of the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560, and FIG. 79 (b) is a top view of the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560. FIG. 79C is a cross-sectional view of the main body member 2561 of the distal end wall member 2560 taken along the line LXXIXc-LXXIXc of FIG. 79 (a) and 79 (d), the shape of the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 79 (a), the first passage forming member 2520 is in the release position ( A state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the coupling position (see FIG. 81) is illustrated in FIG. 79 (d).

  As shown in FIG. 79, the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560 includes a cylindrical main body 2561a that is coaxially supported by the shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 (see FIG. 78), and a radial direction from the main body 2561a. A plate-like plate portion 2561b formed in a straight line, a flow-down hole 2561c formed in the thickness direction of the plate portion 2561b with a diameter equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the main body portion 2561a of the plate portion 2561b on the opposite side A curved wall portion 2561d extending along an arc centered on the main body portion 2561a from the end of the main body portion, and a locking pin protruding in parallel with the axial direction of the main body portion 2561a at the distal end portion of the curved wall portion 2561d 2561e and a portion disposed on the opposite side of the curved wall portion 2561d with the main body member 2561a as a boundary, and are configured in a shape smaller than the opening at the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520. A pushing portion 2561F, mainly comprises.

  The plate portion 2561b is formed such that the length in the radial direction of the main body portion 2561a (length in the extending direction) is longer than the dimension in the short direction (vertical direction in FIG. 80) of the opening at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. The Thereby, the rotation stop position of the tip wall member 2560 in the urging direction of the torsion spring 2562 (see FIG. 78) can be set to a position where the plate portion 2561b and the upper wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b abut (FIG. 79 (d)).

  In the released state (see FIG. 79D), the curved wall portion 2561d stops its flow by colliding with the abutting wall 2561d1 disposed opposite to the ball that has flowed down the first passage forming member 2520. On the other hand, in the connected state, the ball is allowed to pass by moving below the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball that has passed through the flow-down hole 2561c is disposed on the back side of the abutting wall 2561d1. By rolling on 2561d2, it has the role of smoothing the subsequent flow down.

  Next, the operation of the left swing unit 2500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82 are front views of the left swing unit 2500. 80 to 82, the cover member 550 is not shown, and in FIG. 80, the state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position is shown. In FIG. A state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated by a predetermined amount clockwise as viewed from the front is illustrated, and in FIG. 82, a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the coupling position is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 80 to 82, the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated by the outline at the intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 2521a, and the second distribution convex portion 2521g is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 80, when the first passage forming member 2520 is in the release position, the sphere that has flowed down from the game area and has reached the first wall portion 513 is the right side of the second distribution convex portion 2521g in front view. And is retained between the discharge recess 2521h and the first wall 513, the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, and the discharge recess 2521h is disposed on the front side of the side flow down passage 2515. Thus, the ball can flow down the side flow down passage 2515, and the ball is discharged out of the game area. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the balls from being supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 80, the sphere introduced into the discharge recess 2521h stays in the discharge recess 2521h until the first passage forming member 2520 rotates, so that the next sphere enters the discharge recess 2521h. Thus, the next sphere can be kept outside (upper side in FIG. 80) of the rotation trajectory at the tip of the second distribution convex portion 2521g.

  In the sphere held on the outside (upper side in FIG. 80) of the rotation locus at the tip of the second distribution convex portion 2521g, the first passage forming member 2520 rotates clockwise as viewed from the front, and the second distribution convex portion 2521g guides. By being arranged at a position along the right wall portion of the wall portion 513a, it is introduced to the left side of the second distribution convex portion 2521g and supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. The Thereby, even if a plurality of spheres reach the first wall portion 513 in the state shown in FIG. 80, it is possible to keep only one sphere introduced into the discharge recess 2521h.

  As shown in FIG. 80, in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position, the first passage is formed from the base end portion (left end portion in FIG. 80) toward the distal end portion (right end portion in FIG. 80). The member 2520 is configured so as to be inclined upward. Therefore, even if the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated with the sphere supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 remaining, Flows toward the base end by the action of gravity, so that the sphere can be prevented from falling from the front end.

  As shown in FIG. 81, when the first passage forming member 2520 is in the state between the release position and the connection position, the sphere that has flowed down from the game area and has reached the first wall portion 513 is It rides on the tip of the part 2521g and stops flowing down. Accordingly, when the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed between the release position and the coupling position, the balls are supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. Can be prevented.

  Also, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the first passage forming member 2520 is inclined downward toward the tip. Therefore, if the opening at the tip is always open, the ball remains between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 and the state shown in FIG. May fall from the tip end portion of the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball may be caught in another unit (the rotating unit 600 or the like (see FIG. 5)), causing a malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the distal end wall member 2560 is disposed at the opening of the distal end portion of the first passage forming member 2520, and the curved wall portion 2561d functions as an opening lid. Can be reliably prevented from dropping from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  As shown in FIG. 82, when the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the connection position, the sphere that has flowed down from the game area and has reached the first wall portion 513 is left in front view of the second distribution convex portion 2521g. And is moved to the front side through the gap V1 (see FIG. 78), supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522, and the extending direction of the first passage forming member 2520 It flows down along.

  At the coupling position, the pushing portion 2561f of the tip wall member 2560 and the wall surface of the housing recess 422f of the driving side slide member 420 abut (the wall surface of the housing recess 422f is disposed on the displacement locus of the pushing portion 2561f). The curved wall portion 2561d of the wall member 2560 is rotated in the direction projecting outward from the first passage forming member 2520 (counterclockwise in FIG. 82). That is, the rotation of the tip wall member 2560 is caused by a change in the position of the first passage forming member 2520, so that the driving force of the tip wall member 2560 can also be used as the driving force of the first passage forming member 2520. Thereby, reduction of product cost can be aimed at.

  At this time, the tip wall member 2560 is rotated to a position where the plate portion 2561b is in a surface position with respect to the upper and lower wall portions 2522b at the connection position, thereby smoothly smoothing the sphere that has reached the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520. (Without jumping as in the case where a step is generated between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b and 2561b), the ball can be sent to the flow-down hole 2561c.

  The sphere that has passed through the flow-down hole 2561c rolls on the rolling wall 2561d2 of the curved wall portion 2561d, thereby being guided to the sensor member 422c of the driving side slide member 420. That is, the curved wall portion 2561d plays a role of stopping the sphere that has reached the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and a role of guiding the sphere sent from the first passage forming member 2520 through the flow down hole 2561c. It is used for both.

  In addition, in the connection position (refer FIG. 82), since the board part 2561b is made into a surface position with the lower wall part 2522b (refer FIG. 78) of the channel | path cover member 2522, before reaching a connection position, it is. The plate portion 2561b enters the inner side (upper side in FIG. 82) than the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. That is, the sphere can only pass through the flow-down hole 2561c after reaching the connection position (a state where the sphere is stopped by the curved wall portion 2561d is ensured until the connection position is reached).

  Thereby, even when the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated from the coupling position toward the release position in a state where the sphere remains inside the first passage forming member 2520, the sphere is at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. Can be reliably prevented from falling off. This is maintained even when a plurality of balls are sent in succession.

  Referring to FIG. 83, a description will be given of a case where a plurality of balls are continuously sent to first passage forming member 2520. 83 (a) to 83 (c) are partial front views of the left swing unit 2500 and the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400. FIG. 83 (a) to 83 (c), the spherical passages of the first passage forming member 2520 and the second passage forming member 422 are partially viewed in cross section, and in FIG. 83 (a), the first passage A state in which the forming member 2520 is disposed at the coupling position is illustrated. In FIG. 83B, the first passage forming member 2520 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 83A. 83 (c), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated by a predetermined amount counterclockwise in FIG. 83 (b) from the state shown in FIG. 83 (b), and the tip wall member 2560 is rotated. The state is shown.

  Further, in FIGS. 83A to 83C, a sphere that flows down continuously from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated as an example.

  As shown in FIG. 83A, the push-in portion 2561f is in contact with the housing recess 422f in the connected state, and includes a recessed portion 2561f1 on the lower side of FIG. 83A starting from the contacted position. The recessed portion 2561f1 is recessed closer to the shaft support portion 516 than the arc C21 centering on the shaft support portion 516 (see FIG. 37). Therefore, the tip wall member 2560 starts to rotate due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 2562 as the first passage forming member 2520 rotates from FIG. In FIG. 83 (a), a sphere arranged on the right side across the curved wall portion 2561d is referred to as a feed sphere P21, and a sphere arranged on the left side is referred to as a residual sphere P22.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the first passage forming member 2520 starts to rotate, the tip wall member 2560 rotates, so that the curved wall portion 2561d enters inside the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. As a result, the residual sphere P22 comes into contact with the contact wall 2561d, and the flow of the residual sphere P22 stops.

  On the other hand, since the feed ball P21 is disposed on the right side of the curved wall portion 2561d, the flow-down is not stopped by the abutting wall 2561d, and passes through the flow-down hole 2561c to the outside of the first passage forming member 2520. The ball can be sent.

  In this case, the feeding ball P21 may be lifted to the upper end portion of the curved wall portion 2561d (see FIG. 83 (b)), and the upper wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b is opposed to the moving direction of the curved wall portion 2561d. Therefore, when the feed ball P21 is pushed by the wall portion, it can be ensured that the feed ball P21 passes through the flow-down hole 2561c. Thereby, the diameter of the opening of the flow down hole 2561c can be suppressed to the same extent as the diameter of the sphere, and the flow down path of the sphere flowing down the flow down hole 2561c can be stabilized.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (c), from the state shown in FIG. 83 (b), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 83 (c), and the curved wall portion 2561d is connected to the drive side slide member 420. Even if the feed ball P21 remains on the curved wall portion 2561d side when moved above the curved wall portion 422f1, the rolling wall 2561d2 functions as a portion for rolling the feed ball P21, and the rolling wall thereof. The feed ball P21 is caused to flow down while the distance between the lower end portion of 2561d2 and the upper end portion of the curved wall portion 422f1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere (the first passage is formed until the feed ball P21 divides and flows down). By stopping the member 2520 at the position shown in FIG. 83 (c) or slowing down the velocity near the position shown in FIG. 83 (c), it is ensured that the ball flows down from the first passage forming member 2520 to the second passage forming member 422. To do It can be.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 88. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the third symbol display device 81 is disposed at the center position in the left-right direction of the driven-side slide member 430 has been described. The device 81 is disposed on the left side of the driven slide member 3430 in the left-right direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  84 to 88 are front views of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 3400 in the third embodiment illustrating the lifting / lowering operations of the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 3430 in time series. 84 to 88, the left and right members of the cover member 470 are not shown, and the vicinity of the lowering restricting member 415 and the rising restricting member 417 is partially enlarged.

  84 shows the state immediately after the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 contacts the driven slide member 3430. In FIG. 85, the rack 452 is moved up from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 86 illustrates a state where the driven-side slide member 3430 is disposed at the raised position, and FIG. 86 illustrates a state where only the drive-side slide member 420 is lowered from the state illustrated in FIG. 85 and disposed at the lowered position. 86, the driven slide member 3430 is dropped from the state shown in FIG. 86, and the separation action surface 434b which is the lower side surface of the bowl-shaped portion 434 is brought into contact with the separation inclined portion 417f of the rise restriction member 417 and the rise restriction member. FIG. 88 shows a state where 417 is rotated by a predetermined amount. In FIG. 88, the driven side slide member 3430 is further dropped from the state shown in FIG. State dynamic side slide member 3430 is disposed at the lowered position is illustrated.

  84 to 88, the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 3400 includes a base member 410, a drive side slide member 420, a driven side slide member 3430, a drive device 440, a transmission device 450, and a lower front. It mainly includes a plate member 460, a cover member 470, and a solenoid 3480 that is disposed on the front side of the cover member 470 and operates in a manner that prevents the driven-side slide member 3430 from dropping.

  In the base member 410, the lowering restricting member 415 and the raising restricting member 417 are disposed only in the left part of the front view, and the right part of the front member is omitted.

  The driven-side slide member 3430 has a main body member 3431 configured to be elongated in the left-right direction with the third symbol display device 81 decentered from the left-right center position to the left in front view, and the left-right direction of the main body member 3431 A function part 432 arranged at both ends, a guide hole 433 which is a hole formed in the function part 432 in the vertical direction and through which the guide rod 451 is inserted, and the lower end part of the function part 432 rises leftward and rightward. A hook-shaped portion 434 extending in an inclined manner, a fall prevention portion 435 extending on the back side inside the guide hole 433 at the upper end portion of the functional portion 432 (the side close to the other guide hole 433), Is mainly provided.

  The main body member 3431 includes a locking protrusion 3431a that protrudes leftward in a front view at the upper end thereof. The locking projection 3431a is a portion that is locked by a solenoid 3480 disposed on the front side of the cover member 470 and is prevented from dropping. The locking projection 3431a is inclined downward as its upper surface goes toward the tip in the protruding direction.

  The solenoid 3480 includes a bar member 3481 that can protrude and retract to the right in front view, and the lower surface of the bar member 3481 is inclined upward as it goes toward the tip in the overhang direction. The solenoid 3480 is in an immersive state when energized, and is in an overhanging state when not energized. In this overhanging state, the tip of the bar member 3481 protrudes to the left and right center sides from the tip of the locking projection 3431a. Consists of.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the third symbol display device 81 is arranged close to the left side of the front view. As a result, while securing the size of the third symbol display device 81, the left and right regions of the third symbol display device 81 are collected in one place (on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 in FIG. 84), By configuring as a large region, the degree of freedom of the size of the movable member that can be disposed in the vacant region can be improved.

  Since the third symbol display device 81 is arranged close to the left side when viewed from the front, the load applied from the driven side slide member 420 to the rack 452 becomes asymmetrical (the left side becomes larger). Since the left and right racks 452 are connected by the drive side slide member 420, the asymmetry of the load on the rack 452 tends to tilt the postures of the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 84, the wiring housing member 423 is disposed at the lower left end of the second passage forming member 422 when viewed from the front. At this time, the center of gravity position G31 of the wiring storage member 423 is arranged on the left side from the center position of the driving side slide member 420, so that the driving side is driven by the wiring storage member 423 and the weight of the wiring stored in the wiring storage member 423. There is a possibility that the slide member 420 receives a load and tilts counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

  As described above, since the driving side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are easily inclined counterclockwise when viewed from the front, rattling during the raising / lowering operation of the driving side slide member 420 and the rack 452 is prevented. It can be limited to the backlash between the state where 452 keeps the horizontal posture (see FIG. 87) and the state where the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are inclined counterclockwise when viewed from the front (drive side slide). It is possible to suppress the member 420 and the rack 452 from tilting clockwise from the horizontal posture.

  Therefore, the lowering restricting member 415 and the raising restricting member 417 arranged on the left side of the front view guide the raising / lowering operations of the driving side slide member 420 and the rack 452 while effectively suppressing the inclination of the driving side slide member 420 and the rack 452. To do. On the other hand, since the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are not inclined on the right side when viewed from the front, it is not necessary to dispose the lowering restricting member 415 and the rising restricting member 417 outside the functional unit 432 on the right side when viewed from the front. Costs (material costs and assembly man-hours) can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 85, when the drive-side slide member 420 is placed in the raised position, the wiring housing member 423 rises compared to the state shown in FIG. 84, and the center of gravity position G31 is compared with the state shown in FIG. Moved to the left in front view.

  Therefore, the load in the direction in which the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are inclined counterclockwise when viewed from the front increases, and the meshing relationship between the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 may be deteriorated.

  On the other hand, in the state where the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the raised position, the protruding plate 453a is brought into contact with and supported by the lowering restriction member 415. Thereby, it can suppress that the attitude | position of the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 inclines counterclockwise in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 85, when the driven-side slide member 3430 is arranged at the raised position, the locking projection 3431 gets over the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the locking projection 3431 is placed on the rod member 3481. .

  At this time, when the bar member 3481 is pushed in the left-right direction along the inclination of the upper surface of the locking projection 3431, the locking projection 3431 can get over the bar member 3481. As a result, the locking projection 3431 can be placed on the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480 without conducting electricity to the solenoid 3480.

  As shown in FIG. 86, even if the drive-side slide member 420 is lowered while the driven-side slide member 3430 is disposed at the raised position, the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480 is engaged with the locking projection 3431a of the driven-side slide member 3430. , The driven slide member 3430 is prevented from moving downward in conjunction with the drive slide member 420, and the driven slide member 3430 is maintained in the raised position.

  At this time, the driven-side slide member 3430 is disposed at a position where the third symbol display device 81 is shifted from the center position to the left side of the front view, and the center of gravity position is shifted to the left side, so that the solenoid 3480 is only on the left side. Moreover, it can suppress that the driven side slide member 3430 falls.

  That is, when the center of gravity position of the driven side slide member 3430 is at the center in the left-right direction, the driven side slide member 3430 may wobble clockwise or counterclockwise due to vibration or the like. If the driven-side slide member 3430 is tilted clockwise when viewed from the front in a state where the solenoid 3480 is only on the left side, the locking convex portion 3431a may be displaced from the bar member 3481.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the gravity center position of the driven side slide member 3430 is shifted to the left side of the front view, the driven side slide member 3430 is inclined clockwise from the horizontal posture (see FIG. 87) due to vibration or the like. Is suppressed.

  Therefore, the latching convex portion 3431a easily tilts in the direction of approaching the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the abutment of the latching convex portion 3431a and the rod member 3481 is maintained. It is suppressed that it slips off.

  Accordingly, the driven-side slide member 3430 can be stably maintained at the raised position without disposing the solenoid 3480 on both sides of the driven-side slide member 3430 in the left-right direction, so that the number of disposed solenoids 3480 can be reduced. The operation of the driven side slide member 3430 can be made favorable.

  As shown in FIG. 87, when the solenoid 3480 is energized and the bar member 3481 is in an immersive state, the driven side slide member 3430 falls. In the process in which the driven-side slide member 3430 falls, the positions of the hook-shaped portion 434 and the lowering restriction member 415 are displaced in the front-rear direction, so that the hook-like portion 434 is caught by the lowering restriction member 415 and causes a malfunction. Can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 87, when the hook-shaped portion 434 falls in a state of being in contact with the separation inclined portion 417f of the rise restricting member 417, the rise restricting member 417 is rotated outward (counterclockwise in FIG. 87) ( Released state).

  As shown in FIG. 88, when the driven slide member 3430 is disposed at the lowered position, the rise restricting member 417 is rotated inward (clockwise in FIG. 88), and the engaging claw portion 417e of the rise restricting member 417 is The hook-shaped portion 434 is disposed so as to face the vertical direction (engaged state).

  As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the state is changed from the released state to the engaged state when the ascent restricting member 417 is rotated with respect to the bowl-shaped portion 434 of the driven side slide member 3430, so that there is no change in posture. Increase the load and posture change required to change the release state and engagement state compared to the case where the release state and engagement state are changed by the elasticity of the member be able to. Thereby, it is possible to easily maintain the engaged state in which the hook-shaped portion 434 of the driven-side slide member 3430 and the ascending restriction member 417 are engaged.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the rise restricting member 417 is rotated by the fall of the driven side slide member 3430. That is, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive device in order to form the engagement state of the ascending restriction member 417. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which the opposing wall portion 422f2 projects from the lower end portion of the upper wall portion 424b of the connection member 424 in the downward inclined position. An opposing wall portion 4422f2 disposed to face the wall portion 422f1 is configured as a planar wall portion extending in the vertical direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 89 (a) is a partial front view of the drive side slide member 4420 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 89 (b) is a side view of the drive side slide member 4420 as seen in the direction of arrow LXXXIXb in FIG. 89 (a). FIG. 89 (c) is a partial front view of the drive side slide member 4420. 89 (a) and 89 (c), the drive-side slide member 4420 is viewed in cross-section at the center position of the connecting member 4424 in the front-rear direction (FIG. 89 (a) perpendicular to the paper surface). 89 (a) and 89 (b) illustrate the downwardly inclined state of the connecting member 4424, and FIG. 89 (c) illustrates the upwardly inclined state of the connecting member 4424.

  The connection member 4424 includes an extended claw portion 4424f that extends rightward from the lower end portion of the upper side wall portion 424b.

  The extended claw portion 4424f is disposed to face the curved wall portion 422f1 in the upwardly inclined state, is concavely curved in a direction away from the curved wall portion 422f1, and as shown in FIG. (B) Left and right direction) A pair of recessed portions are provided in the intermediate portion.

  The 2nd channel | path formation member 4422 is provided with the opposing wall part 4422f2 arrange | positioned facing the curved wall part 422f1. The opposing wall portion 4422f2 is a plate portion that extends in the vertical direction along the opening of the sensor member 422c, and the recessed portion is arranged in a manner that does not interfere with the extended claw portion 4424f and is shown in FIG. 89 (a). In the state, it extends to a position overlapping with the extended claw portion 4424f.

  According to the present embodiment, in the downwardly inclined state shown in FIG. 89 (a), there are no portions (projections or the like) that are damaged when the sphere collides with the path of the sphere. When a ball is sent from 520 to the connecting member 4424, the member can be prevented from being damaged by colliding with the ball.

  In the upward inclined state shown in FIG. 89 (b), the extended claw portion 4424f and the opposing wall portion 4422f2 guide the sphere, so that the sphere can be prevented from being clogged in the vicinity of the sensor member 422c.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case has been described in which the upper end portion (the radially outer portion of the distribution convex portion 521e) of the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is opened, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Absent. For example, the cover member that covers the open portion of the upper end portion of the first passage forming member 520 opens the sphere supply side in the left and right regions of the distribution convex portion 521e, and the sphere supply side The opposite side may operate in a manner that covers it. In this case, it is possible to prevent foreign matters other than spheres from entering the left and right regions of the distribution convex portion 521e.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the connection member 424 is rotated in contact with the first passage forming member 520 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the arrangement of the connection member 424 may be omitted. In this case, the product cost can be reduced by reducing the number of parts required for the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422. Further, instead of the connecting member 424, a rubber-like elastic body having an internal passage may be provided. In this case, the displacement of the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is absorbed by the deformation of the shape of the rubber elastic body caused by the first passage forming member 520 coming into contact with the rubber elastic body. be able to.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the driving side slide member 420 is driven by one rack 452 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the rack for driving the drive-side slide member 420 is composed of two layers of front and rear, and the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down with the front rack and the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down with the rear rack. And may be configured. In this case, when only one of the two-layer racks is in contact with the driven-side slide member 430 in the vertical direction, the drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430 move up and down in conjunction with each other, It is possible to switch between the case where the drive side slide member 420 passes the driven side slide member 430 and moves up and down independently.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b protrude outward from the circle formed by the tooth bases of the other gear teeth is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, one of the contact part 351b and the receiving part 354b may be configured to be recessed toward the center side from the circle formed by the tooth base of the other gear tooth, and the other may be extended longer.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the portion that contacts the contact portion 351b is the adjacent gear tooth 354c having a gear tooth shape, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a portion having a shape different from the gear tooth shape may be formed, and the portion and the contact portion 351b may be in contact with each other.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the portion that comes into contact with the contact portion 351b is the receiving portion 354b in which the tooth shape is not formed, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a portion of the gear tooth that is formed in a tooth shape may be partially cut to form a surface that contacts the contact portion 351b.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case has been described in which the entire overlapping portion of the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b comes into contact with each other, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the surface contact area may be reduced by providing a recessed portion that is recessed toward the rotating shaft at an intermediate position between the contact portion 351b or the receiving portion 354b.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the left and right ascending restriction members 417 contact with the drive side slide member 420 at the same timing has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, one of the left and right ascending restriction members 417 may be brought into contact with the drive side slide member 420. In this case, a left-right asymmetric load can be applied to the drive-side slide member 420, and the drive-side slide member 420 can be inclined even when the center of gravity of the drive-side slide member 420 is shifted to the left or right (one of the left and right). Can be suppressed.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the tip wall member 2560 is disposed at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, an aspect in which a blower that sends air from the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520 toward the proximal end side is disposed, or an aspect in which a magnetic force generating device is provided at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520 to adsorb a sphere by magnetic force. Or the aspect which vibrates the front-end | tip of the 1st channel | path formation member 2520 to a rotation direction may be sufficient. In this case, the sphere can be prevented from falling from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the first passage forming member 2520 is inclined upward toward the distal end side in the released state, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, you may provide the intermediate part which sinks between the base end part of the 1st channel | path formation member 2520, and a front-end | tip part (it may be comprised in a U shape). In this case, when the sphere remains in the first passage forming member 2520 in the released state, the sphere can be retained at the intermediate portion (position on the distal end side with respect to the base end portion), so that the communication state is changed. When this is done, it is possible to shorten the period until the ball is sent from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the lowering restricting member 415 and the raising restricting member 417 are disposed on one side has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the lowering restricting member 415 and the rising restricting member 417 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the base member 410, and the elastic coefficients of the torsion springs 415d and 417g for biasing the lowering restricting member 415 and the rising restricting member 417 are set to the left side. There may be a difference between the torsion springs 415d and 417g provided and the torsion springs 415d and 417g provided on the right side. At this time, the elasticity of the torsion springs 415d and 417g provided on the right side of the front view is larger than that of the torsion springs 415d and 417g provided on the left side of the front view (the side on which the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 is offset). It is preferable to reduce the coefficient. In this case, a load that changes the posture of the driven slide member 3430 counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the lowering restricting member 415 and the rising restricting member 417 (the direction in which the driven slide member 3430 tilts due to the deviation of the center of gravity) is In the case where the driven side slide member 3430 changes its posture clockwise when viewed from the front due to the sudden vertical movement of the driven side slide member 3430, the change in the posture can be suppressed.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the driven-side slide member 430 falls after the drive-side slide member 420 is disposed at the lowered position has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the driven side slide member 430 may be dropped in a state where the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the intermediate position. In this state, control (control to repeatedly switch between the rising operation and the lowering operation) may be performed in a mode in which the driving side slide member 420 is operated in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the driven side slide member 430. In this case, it is possible to produce an effect in which the driven-side slide member 430 is rebounded by the drive-side slide member 420 (such as being repeatedly rebounded).

  In each of the above embodiments, the divided member DV in a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621 is separated by the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638. Although the case where it drives is demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this, The division member DV in the state by which the insertion part 644a of the connection link member 644 was inserted in the large diameter part 621a of the connection link effect | action groove | channel 621 is used as one side. You may drive by the rotational drive member 637 and the other side rotational drive member 638. FIG. In this case, since the interval between the divided member DV that applies the driving force and the adjacent divided member DV is widened, the adjacent divided member DV, the one side rotational drive member 637, and the other side rotational drive member 638 Thus, the diameters of the one-side rotation driving member and the other-side rotation driving member can be increased accordingly. As a result, it is possible to increase the driving torque applied to the divided member DV (rotating member 640) from the one side rotation driving member and the other side rotation driving member.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the period during which the engaging portion 637b of the one side rotation driving member 637 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV and the engaging portion 638b of the other side rotation driving member 638 are divided members. Although the case where the period engaged with the driven part 641 of DV overlaps was demonstrated (refer FIG. 75), it is not necessarily restricted to this, The engaging part 637b of the one side rotational drive member 637 or others While one of the engaging portions 638b of the side rotation drive member 638 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV, the other is disengaged and the engagement portion of the one side rotation drive member 637 is engaged. 637b or one of the engaging portions 638b of the other side rotational drive member 638 may be disengaged during the period in which the other is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV.

  In this case, it is possible to avoid the engagement portion 637b of the one side rotation drive member 637 and the engagement portion 638b of the other side rotation drive member 638 from being simultaneously engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. . That is, the engaging portion 637b of the one side rotation driving member 637 or the engaging portion 638b of the other side rotation driving member 638 can be alternately engaged with the engaged portion 641. Thereby, the displacement of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  That is, between the one side rotational drive member 637 and the other side rotational drive member 638, a phase shift occurs due to dimensional tolerance, assembly tolerance, drive tolerance of the drive motor 631, and the like. In the rotating member 640 formed by connecting the DVs in an endless manner, the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotation driving member 638 are simultaneously engaged with the divided member DV. When a phase shift occurs while engaged with the portion 641, one section in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640 is compressed and the other section is pulled, so that the displacement of the rotating member 640 is unstable. It becomes.

  On the other hand, as described above, the engaging portion 637b of the one side rotation driving member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other side rotation driving member 638 are alternately engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. Thus, even if a phase shift occurs, it can be avoided that the rotating member 640 is affected by the influence. As a result, even if the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting a plurality of divided members DV in an endless manner, the displacement can be stabilized.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the divided member DV is connected endlessly in the rotary unit 600 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the divided member DV is connected endlessly (from one end to the other end). Of course, it is possible to connect the dividing member DV between the first and second ends and to disconnect one end and the other end). In this case, for example, the segmented member DV connected endlessly may be displaced (moved) along the endless track in each of the above-described embodiments, or may be positioned along the endless track. The divided members DV connected in the end shape may be reciprocated (reciprocated).

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<About the concept of the invention taking as an example the structure that restricts the rotation of the second gear 352 by the locking arc portion 351c>
A game machine comprising: a driving means; a transmission member that transmits a driving force of the driving means; and a displacement member that is displaced between a rising position and a lowering position by the driving force transmitted by the transmission member. The member includes a first gear and a second gear that is meshed with the first gear and disposed closer to the displacement member in the transmission path of the driving force than the first gear. The gear includes a contact portion formed on a part of its tooth profile, and in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, a predetermined tooth of the second gear is placed on the contact portion of the first gear. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends is restricted by the contact.

  Here, there is a gaming machine comprising a driving means, a transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving means, and a displacement member that is displaced between the raised position and the lowered position by the driving force transmitted by the transmission member. Are known. For example, the transmission member is formed by a rack and pinion mechanism, the rotation of the pinion driven by the driving means is converted into the linear movement of the rack, and the displacement member is moved up and down between the lowered position and the raised position by the linear movement of the rack. There are some (Patent Document 1: JP 2012-80941 A, for example). In this case, when the driving force of the driving unit is released in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the displacement member is lowered by its own weight. For this reason, it is necessary to continuously apply the driving force of the driving means, and there is a problem that energy consumption increases when the displacement member is held at the raised position. On the other hand, a crank mechanism is interposed in a part of the driving means, and the displacement member is not lowered from its raised position by its own weight even when the driving force of the driving means is released by utilizing the dead point of the crank mechanism. There is also a known structure (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-140602). However, in this case, there is a problem that the entire transmission member is increased by the amount of the crank mechanism.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the first gear includes a contact portion formed at a part of its tooth profile, and the first gear abuts when the displacement member is disposed at the raised position. Since the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends is restricted by the predetermined teeth of the second gear coming into contact with the portion, the displacement member does not move even if the driving force of the driving means is released. It is possible to suppress descending by its own weight. Therefore, energy consumption when holding the displacement member at the raised position can be suppressed. Further, the structure for holding the displacement member in the raised position can be formed by the first gear and the second gear, and it is not necessary to separately provide a crank mechanism, so that the transmission member can be reduced in size. it can.

  In the gaming machine A1, the second gear includes a receiving portion formed on a part of its tooth profile, and the first gear is brought into contact with the first gear in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that rotation of the second gear in a direction in which the displacement member ascends is restricted by contacting the receiving portions of the two gears.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, when the receiving portion of the second gear comes into contact with the contact portion of the first gear, the second gear rotates in the direction in which the displacement member rises. In other words, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the rotation of the second gear is restricted in both the forward and reverse directions, and rattling occurs in the displacement member held at the raised position. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the first gear is allowed to rotate in the direction in which the displacement member is lowered in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the first gear is allowed to rotate in the direction in which the displacement member is lowered. There is no need to separately perform an operation for releasing the contact between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear, and the first gear is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, so that the lift position is reached. The held displacement member can be lowered. That is, the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member is lowered is restricted, while the rotation of the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member is lowered is allowed. Therefore, when the displacement member tries to descend from its raised position by its own weight, the predetermined tooth of the second gear is brought into contact with the contact portion of the first gear, thereby restricting the rotation of the second gear and the displacement member. Can be held in the raised position. On the other hand, when the first gear is rotated, the second gear is rotated along with the rotation, and the displacement member can be lowered.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear is formed so as to be able to mesh with a predetermined tooth of the second gear when rotating in a direction in which the displacement member is raised. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the tooth depth of the first gear is lower than that of the first gear, and the predetermined tooth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the tip surface of the tooth.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear meshes with a predetermined tooth of the second gear when rotating in the direction of raising the displacement member. Since the tooth depth is lower than the teeth of the first gear and the predetermined teeth of the second gear can come into contact with the tooth tip surface, the first gear is moved in the direction of raising the displacement member. When the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the second gear can be rotated in the direction of raising the displacement member via the contact portion and the engagement of the predetermined teeth. As a result, a state in which the predetermined tooth of the second gear can come into contact with the contact portion of the first gear (the state where the contact portion (tooth tip surface) of the first gear faces the predetermined tooth of the second gear). Can be reliably formed.

  In the gaming machine A4, the abutment portion of the first gear has a tooth thickness larger than that of the teeth of the first gear.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, the contact portion of the first gear has a tooth thickness larger than that of the teeth of the first gear. Possible areas can be secured. Therefore, the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position can be made gentle (the allowable amount is increased). As a result, it is possible to reliably form a state in which the predetermined teeth of the second gear can come into contact with the contact portion of the first gear.

  The contact portion of the first gear is a part that receives predetermined teeth of the second gear and restricts the rotation of the second gear (that is, supports the weight of the displacement member). Since it is enlarged, the strength can be secured.

  In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the abutment portion of the first gear is formed such that the tooth tip surface is curved in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the first gear. .

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4 or A5, the contact portion of the first gear is formed such that its tooth tip surface is curved in an arc shape centering on the rotation center of the first gear. Therefore, the strength of the first gear can be improved while allowing the first gear to rotate until the predetermined tooth of the second gear is in contact with the contact portion (tooth surface) of the first gear. Can be planned.

  Further, when the second gear is rotated in the direction in which the displacement member is lowered and the predetermined tooth of the second gear comes into contact with the contact portion (tooth surface) of the first gear, the predetermined value of the second gear is determined. The direction of the force acting from the first tooth to the contact portion of the first gear is set to the direction toward the rotation axis of the first gear, so that it is possible to easily suppress the rotation of the first gear. As a result, the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends can be easily controlled, and even when the driving force of the drive means is released, the displacement member can be reliably prevented from being lowered by its own weight.

In the gaming machine A6, the second gear includes a receiving portion formed on a part of its tooth profile,
In a state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position, the contact portion of the first gear is brought into contact with the receiving portion of the second gear, whereby the first member in the direction in which the displacement member is raised. A gaming machine A7 characterized in that the rotation of the gears is restricted.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A6, the second gear includes the receiving portion formed on a part of its tooth profile, and the first member is disposed in the raised position. The rotation of the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member ascends is restricted by the contact portion of the gear being brought into contact with the receiving portion of the second gear. It can function as a stopper that stops the rotation of the first gear after being placed in the raised position.

  In the gaming machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear is concave on the side facing the contact portion of the first gear toward the rotation shaft of the second gear, and the arc of the contact portion of the first gear A gaming machine A8 that is curved into an arc shape having a diameter substantially equal to the shape.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear has a concave side on the side facing the contact portion of the first gear toward the rotation axis of the second gear and the first gear. Since it is curved and formed into an arc shape having a diameter substantially equal to the arc shape of the contact portion of the gear, when the contact portion of the first gear contacts the receiving portion of the second gear, both faces The contact portion of the first gear can be firmly received by the receiving portion of the second gear. As a result, the receiving portion of the second gear can reliably exert its function as a stopper for stopping the rotation of the first gear after the displacement member is disposed at the raised position.

  Further, since the receiving portion of the second gear is curved in a concave arc shape toward the rotation shaft of the second gear, the tooth height on both sides in the tooth thickness direction can be increased, and the strength of the receiving portion is increased. Can be increased. Thereby, damage to the receiving part of the second gear when receiving the contact part of the first gear can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines A4 to A8, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the engagement between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear is released, and The gaming machine A9 is characterized in that the displacement member is positioned at the end of the movable range in the upward direction.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A4 to A8, in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined teeth of the second gear And the displacement member is positioned at the end of the movable range in the ascending direction, so that the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position by the rotation of the first gear in the direction of ascending the displacement member. Later, only the first gear can be rotated in the direction in which the displacement member rises while the second gear is stopped. Thereby, the state in which the predetermined tooth of the second gear can come into contact with the contact portion of the first gear (the state in which the contact portion (tooth tip surface) of the first gear faces the predetermined tooth of the second gear) Can be reliably formed.

<About the concept of the invention taking as an example a structure that connects the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422>
A first passage member and a second passage member formed so that a ball can pass therethrough, and at least the first passage member is displaced so that one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member communicate with each other. A communication state in which a ball can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member In a gaming machine that can be formed in a separated state in which the first passage member or the second passage member is disengaged, the first passage member or the second passage member is displaceably disposed at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member. A gaming machine B1 comprising a connecting member that communicates between one end of each of the first passage member and the second passage member in a state of being displaced in contact with the other of the two passage members.

  Here, the first passage member and the second passage member are formed so that the sphere can pass therethrough, and at least the first passage member is displaced so that one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are communicated with each other. A communication state in which a ball can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member are not There is known a gaming machine in which a separated state can be formed (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-171636). In this case, due to dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of each part, it is inevitable that variations occur in the stop position when the first passage member is displaced and the arrangement position of the second passage member. Therefore, in the communication state, the first passage member and the second passage member are displaced from each other at the positions of the one end, so that it is difficult to stably feed the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. was there.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the state is disposed at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member and is displaced in contact with the other of the first passage member or the second passage member. Then, since the connection member which connects between the one ends of the 1st passage member and the 2nd passage member is provided, even when the position of the ends of the 1st passage member and the 2nd passage member has shifted, those one ends The displacement can be absorbed by the displacement of the connecting portion interposed between the two. As a result, ball feeding from the first passage member to the second passage member can be stabilized. Further, as the first passage member is displaced, the first passage member abuts on the connection member to displace the connection member, so that the driving force for displacing the first passage member can also be used, and the connection member is displaced. It is not necessary to provide a separate driving force.

  In the gaming machine B1, the connection member includes one side wall portion and another side wall portion that are opposed to each other with an opening at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member, and the one side wall portion is When the first passage member is located on the displacement locus of the first passage member and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall portion of the connection member. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the connecting member is displaced and the other side wall portion of the connecting member is brought close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the first passage member is displaced, and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall portion of the connection member. Since the connecting member is displaced and the other side wall portion of the connecting member is brought close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member, the one side wall portion and the other side wall portion of the connecting member are connected in the communication state. The first passage member and the second passage member can be brought closer to each other, and the positional deviation between the first passage member and the one end of the second passage member can be easily absorbed. As a result, ball feeding from the first passage member to the second passage member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the communication state is formed by rotating the first passage member with one end thereof as a rotation tip side, and the connection member has a rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the first passage member. When the first passage member is rotated and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall portion of the connection member, the connection member is rotated, The gaming machine B3, wherein the other side wall portion of the connecting member is adjacent to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, a communication state is formed by rotating the first passage member with one end thereof as a rotation tip side, and the connection member is connected to the first passage. Since the rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the member is provided, the displacement (rotation) of the connection member accompanying the displacement (rotation) of the first passage member can be smoothly performed. Moreover, the other side wall part of a connection member can be brought closer to the other end of a 1st channel | path member or a 2nd channel | path member by utilizing both rotation operation | movement.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, in the communication state, the connection member is configured such that one of the opposing surfaces of the one side wall portion and the other side wall portion has a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. A gaming machine B4, wherein the gaming machine B4 is a rolling surface when the ball is sent, and in the communication state, the one opposing surface is inclined downward from the first passage member toward the second passage member.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2 or B3, it is possible to stabilize the ball feeding in the communication portion between the first passage member and one end of the second passage member. That is, since the communication portion between the one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member is a portion where the positional deviation becomes large, the ball feeding surface becomes unstable, so that the ball rolling surface is formed in the communication portion. One opposing surface is inclined downward from the first passage member toward the second passage member, so that the ball can be rolled to stabilize the ball feeding.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, in the communication state, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be sent from one end of the first passage member, and in the release state, the ball in the first passage member A gaming machine B5, comprising a ball sending restricting means for restricting a ball from being sent from one end of the first passage member.

  Here, in the released state, one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member are not communicated. When a ball is supplied to the passage member, the ball that has passed through the first passage member may fall out of the game area. Further, in the communication state, even when the sphere is supplied to the first passage member, if the sphere stays in the first passage member for some reason and shifts to the release state in that state, the first passage member There is a risk that the ball staying in the ball will fall into the game area. If the sphere falls outside the game area, the movement of the movable member such as a gear or a crank mechanism may be hindered, or the sphere may be sandwiched to cause damage to the movable member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be sent from one end of the first passage member in the communication state. At the same time, since it is provided with a ball feeding restricting means for restricting the ball in the first passage member from being fed from one end of the first passage member in the released state, for example, when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, Even when the sphere stays on the first passage member and shifts from the communication state to the release state, the sphere can be prevented from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member.

  In the gaming machine B5, the gaming machine B5 includes a cover body that is disposed at one end of the first passage member and that allows the passage of the sphere in the communication state and restricts the passage of the sphere in the release state. A gaming machine B6 characterized by forming means.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, a cover serving as a ball-feeding restricting means that allows passage of the ball in the communication state and restricts the passage of the ball in the released state is provided at one end of the first passage member. Since the body is disposed, for example, even when the sphere is supplied to the first passage member in the release state, or even when the sphere remains in the first passage member and the transition is made from the communication state to the release state, It can suppress that a ball | bowl falls out of a game area | region from the end of a member.

  In the gaming machine B5, an urging member that applies an urging force to the cover body to maintain the cover body at a position that restricts the passage of the ball, and acts on the cover body in accordance with the displacement of the first passage member. And an action member that displaces the cover body in a direction that allows passage of the ball when at least the communication state is formed.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the gaming machine B7 includes a biasing member that applies a biasing force to the cover body and maintains the cover body in a position that restricts the passage of the ball. The body can be prevented from being inadvertently displaced, and as a result, the ball can be more reliably prevented from dropping from the one end of the first passage member to the outside of the game area. On the other hand, when the communication state is formed, the cover body is displaced in a direction allowing passage of the sphere, so that the sphere can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member.

  In this case, since the displacement of the cover body in the direction allowing the passage of the sphere is performed along with the displacement of the first passage member by the action of the action member, the driving means for displacing the first passage member is displaced by the cover body. It can be used also as a drive means for making it possible to reduce the product cost accordingly.

  The acting member is positioned on the displacement locus of the cover body accompanying the displacement of the first passage member, and abuts against the cover body displaced along the displacement locus, thereby resisting the urging force of the urging member. Then, the driving force of the driving means for displacing the cover body (for example, the second passage member, the connection member, the member fixed to the game board, etc.) or the driving means for displacing the first passage member. Is transmitted to the cover body, and the cover body is displaced together with the displacement of the first passage member (for example, a gear or a rack and pinion that converts the driving means and the driving force into a rotational motion or a linear motion and transmits it to the cover body. ) Is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine B5, the pitching restricting means arranges the first passage member in a posture in which one end of the first passage member is at the uppermost position in the released state.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the ball-throwing restricting means arranges the first passage member in the released state in a posture in which one end of the first passage member is at the uppermost position. Even when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or even when the ball remains in the first passage member and the transition is made from the communication state to the released state, the ball goes out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. It can suppress falling.

  Note that the first passage member disposed in a posture in which one end of the first passage member is in the uppermost position in the released state does not require the whole first passage member to be inclined upward. There may be a region that is horizontal or inclined downward.

  In the gaming machine B5, the ball-throwing restricting means is characterized in that in the released state, the first passage member is disposed in a posture in which the first passage member is inclined upward from the other end of the first passage member to one end. Game machine B9.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B5, the pitching restricting means is disposed in a posture in which the first passage member is inclined upward from the other end of the first passage member to one end in the released state. Therefore, for example, even when the sphere is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or when the sphere remains in the first passage member and the transition is made from the communication state to the released state, the sphere starts from one end of the first passage member. Can be easily prevented from falling outside the gaming area.

  Further, when the communication state is formed, a state in which the entire first passage member is inclined downward from the other end to the one end can be formed, so that it is easy to send a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. , It is possible to suppress the ball from staying on the way. Therefore, when it transfers to a cancellation | release state, it can suppress that the ball | bowl which remained in the 1st channel | path member falls to a game area.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, a case body having an upstream passage and a downstream passage formed so that a ball can pass therethrough, a one-side position for distributing the ball flowing down from the upstream passage to the first passage, and A displacing member that displaces a ball that flows down from the upstream passage to the downstream passage, and the case body is formed by opening both sides of the displacing direction of the allocating member. A gaming machine B10.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the case body is formed with both sides of the displacing direction of the distributing member open, so that the case body can be moved to one side position or the other side position. Even when a sphere flows down between the sorting member and the case body that are displaced toward each other, the sphere that has flowed down can be prevented from being sandwiched between the sorting member and the case body.

  In the gaming machine B10, the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, and when the communication state is formed by the displacement of the first passage member, the distribution member is disposed at the one side position, When the release state is formed by the displacement of the first passage member, the sorting member is disposed at the other side position.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B10, the sorting member is formed in the first passage member, and the displacement member is disposed at one side position and the other side position in accordance with the displacement of the first passage member. Therefore, the driving means for displacing the first passage member can also be used as the driving means for displacing the distribution member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Here, in the structure in which the distribution member is displaced independently of the first passage member, for example, when a displacement occurs between the distribution member and the first passage member due to the occurrence of control failure, The balls are distributed to the first passage member at the position (that is, the distribution member is disposed at one side position), and the balls may fall from one end of the first passage member to the outside of the game area. On the other hand, in the gaming machine B10, since the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, the displacement states of the distribution member and the first passage member can always be synchronized. Therefore, even if a control failure occurs, it is possible to avoid the balls from being distributed to the first passage member in the released state (that is, when the released state is formed, the sorting member is always positioned at the other side). As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from dropping from one end of the first passage member to the outside of the game area.

  In the gaming machine B11, the first passage member includes a wall portion defining a passage through which a ball passes, and the wall portion of the first passage member serves as the distribution member.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B11, the first passage member includes a wall portion that defines a passage through which a ball passes, and the wall portion of the first passage member is a distribution member. By sharing parts, it is possible to reduce the cost of parts. Moreover, the distributed sphere can be surely flowed down to the passage by using the wall portion defining the passage through which the sphere passes as a sorting member.

<About the concept of the invention taking as an example a structure that regulates the rebound of the driven-side slide member 430>
A guide member extending in the vertical direction, a displacement member guided by the guide member and displaceable along the guide member between the raised position and the lowered position, and the displacement member supported at the lowered position A support member and an elevating member formed so as to be movable up and down along the guide member, and the displacement member is raised from the lowered position to the raised position by being pushed up by the elevating member as the elevating member is raised. In the gaming machine in which the displacement member is lowered from the raised position to the lowered position by its own weight as the elevating member is lowered, when the displacement member is lowered to the lowered position, A gaming machine C1 including a rise restricting member that restricts displacement.

  Here, a guide member extending in the vertical direction, a displacement member guided by the guide member and displaceable along the guide member between the raised position and the lowered position, and the displaced member supported at the lowered position And a lifting member formed so as to be movable up and down along the guide member, the displacement member is raised from the lowered position to the raised position by being pushed up by the raising and lowering member as the lifting member rises, A gaming machine in which a displacement member is lowered from a raised position to a lowered position by its own weight as the elevating member descends is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-233494). In this case, the displacement member lowered by its own weight along the guide member is placed on the support member and supported by the support member, thereby maintaining the lowered position. However, since the displacement member is mounted on the support member and can be displaced in the upward direction along the guide member, rattling is likely to occur due to disturbance, and the posture of the displacement member in the lowered position There is a problem that is unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is provided along the guide member at the lowered position because the elevation member is provided to regulate the displacement of the displacement member in the upward direction when the displacement member is lowered to the lowered position. Displacement in the upward direction can be restricted, and rattling caused by disturbance can be suppressed. As a result, the posture of the displacement member at the lowered position can be stabilized.

  The gaming machine C1 includes an urging unit that urges the rise restricting member in a direction approaching the displacement member, and the displacement member contacts the rise restricting member when the displacement member is lowered by its own weight. A separating action part for displacing the ascent restricting member in a direction away from the displacement member, and allowing the ascent restricting member to displace in the direction approaching the displaceable member at the lowered position and A gaming machine C2 comprising an engaging portion to be engaged.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the displacement member includes a separation action unit that displaces the rising restricting member in a direction away from the displacement member when the displacement member is lowered by its own weight, and a lowered position. Since the engagement portion that engages with the rise restricting member is provided, the restricted state by the rise restricting member can be formed only by the operation of lowering the displacement member by its own weight to the lowered position, and the restricted state by the rise restricting member is formed. There is no need to provide a separate drive source for this. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, the engagement between the rise restricting member and the engaging portion is performed after allowing the rise restricting member to be displaced in the direction approaching the displacement member. The force necessary for releasing the engagement and the displacement of the ascending restriction member can be increased. As a result, even when a disturbance is input, it is possible to easily maintain the engagement between the rise restricting member and the engaging portion.

  In the gaming machine C2, the gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the disengagement between the rising restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is performed by raising the lifting member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2, the disengagement between the rising restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacing member is performed by raising the elevating member. Even if it is a case where it is going to crawl after being inputted, it can suppress that engagement with the engaging part of a raise control member and a displacement member being released carelessly.

  Further, since the engagement between the ascending restriction member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is released by raising the elevating member, there is no need to separately provide a drive source for releasing such engagement, and elevating The drive source for raising and lowering the member can be used as the drive source for releasing the engagement between the ascending restriction member and the engaging portion of the displacement member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. .

  Further, when a separate drive source for releasing the engagement between the ascending restriction member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is provided, for example, due to the occurrence of control failure, In the state where the engagement is not released, there is a possibility that the elevating member rises and pushes up the displacement member. According to the gaming machine C3, the engagement between the ascending restriction member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is released. When the displacement member is pushed up by the elevating member, the elevating member is engaged with the engaging portion of the displacement member. Can be surely released.

  In the gaming machine C3, the elevating member contacts the elevating restriction member when the elevating member is raised, and displaces the elevating restriction member, whereby the elevating restriction member and the engaging portion of the displacement member A gaming machine C4 comprising a release action portion for releasing the engagement.

  Here, the disengagement between the ascending restriction member and the engaging portion of the displacement member can be performed by a push-up force when pushing up the displacement member as the elevating member moves up and down. Therefore, it is necessary to establish an engagement state that can be released by this, and it becomes difficult to perform strong engagement. Further, in this case, when the engagement is released, vibration is generated by the reaction, and the posture of the displacement member becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3, the lifting member is brought into contact with the lifting restricting member when the lifting member is lifted to displace the lifting restricting member. Since the release action part for releasing the engagement between the member and the engagement part of the displacement member is provided, even when the ascending restriction member and the engagement part of the displacement member are firmly engaged, the release is surely performed. be able to. In other words, since a strong engagement state can be formed, rattling of the displacement member due to disturbance can be suppressed and the posture of the displacement member at the lowered position can be stabilized. In addition, vibration due to reaction when the engagement is released can be suppressed, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, when the engagement with the engaging portion of the displacement member is released, the ascent restricting member is the ascending / descending member that moves the displaceable member between the descending position and the ascending position. A gaming machine C5 that is abutted.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3 or C4, when the engagement with the engaging portion of the displacement member is released, the ascending restriction member moves the displacement member between the lowered position and the raised position. Since it abuts on the elevating member that moves up and down, it functions as a guide guide and can suppress rattling when the elevating member is raised and lowered. As a result, the posture of the displacement member that moves up and down with the lifting member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine C5, a gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the ascending restriction member that is in contact with the elevating member is urged by the urging means in a direction close to the elevating member.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C5, the lifting restricting member that is in contact with the lifting member is biased by the biasing means in the direction approaching the lifting member, so that the lifting member is moved in a certain direction. The posture can be stabilized. Further, rattling of the elevating member can be suppressed by the elastic buffering action of the urging means.

  The gaming machine C6 includes a driving unit, a pinion that is rotationally driven by the driving unit, and a rack that meshes with the pinion. The rack is disposed on the lifting member, and the lifting member A gaming machine C7, wherein the biasing means is biased by the biasing means in a direction away from the pinion via a rise restricting member.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, the rotational motion of the pinion that is rotationally driven by the driving means is converted into the linear motion of the rack, and the lifting member is raised and lowered along the guide member by the linear motion. The In this case, since the elevating member is biased in the direction in which the rack is separated from the pinion via the ascending restriction member, the interval between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion can be stabilized. That is, when the elevating member swings in the direction in which the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion is reduced, the urging force of the urging means acts in the direction to increase the distance, while the direction in which the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion is increased. In the case where the elevating and lowering member rattles, it can be regulated by the guide structure by the guide member that the interval is widened beyond a certain level. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the interval between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion from being narrowed and the meshing resistance from becoming excessive.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the gaming machine C8 is provided with a lowering restricting member that restricts a displacement of the elevating member in a descending direction when the elevating member pushes up the displacement member to the raised position.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, when the elevating member pushes the displacement member to the ascending position, the gaming machine C8 includes the descending regulating member that regulates the displacement of the elevating member in the descending direction. The provided displacement member and elevating member can be supported by the lowering restricting member. As a result, the driving force for holding the displacement member in the raised position can be made unnecessary, so that the energy consumption of the driving means for driving the elevating member can be suppressed.

  Further, since the restriction by the lowering restriction member is performed by raising the lifting member, there is no need to separately provide a driving source for forming the restriction by the lowering restriction member, and the driving source for raising and lowering the lifting member. Can also be used as a drive source for forming a restriction by the lowering restriction member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine C8, the release of the restriction by the lowering restriction member is performed by lowering the lifting member.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C8, since the release of the restriction by the lowering restriction member is performed by lowering the lifting member, it is necessary to separately provide a drive source for releasing such restriction Therefore, the drive source for raising and lowering the elevating member can also be used as the drive source for releasing the restriction of the lowering restricting member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, when a separate drive source for releasing the restriction by the lowering restriction member is provided, for example, the raising and lowering member is lowered and driven in a state where the restriction by the lowering restriction member is not released due to the occurrence of control failure. Where there is a risk of overload acting on the source or damage to the lowering restricting member, etc., according to the gaming machine C9, it is possible to release the restriction by the lowering restricting member in accordance with the lowering operation of the lifting member. When the elevating member is lowered, it is possible to form a state where the restriction by the lowering restricting member is reliably released.

  If the lowering restricting member is not an elevating member but a structure that restricts displacement of the displacing member in the lowering direction, the structure for releasing the restriction by the lowering restricting member as the elevating member descends is complicated. However, according to the gaming machines C8 and C9, since the lowering restricting member has a structure that restricts the displacement of the elevating member in the lowering direction, the release of the restriction by the lowering restricting member is accompanied with the lowering of the elevating member. The structure to be performed can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine C8 or C9, in a state where the lowering restriction member restricts the displacement of the elevating member in the lowering direction, the elevating restriction member is brought into contact with the elevating member, and the lowering restriction member acts as the elevating member. A gaming machine C10, wherein the abutting direction is different from the abutting direction of the ascending restriction member against the elevating member.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in the gaming machine C8 or C9, the direction in which the lowering restricting member comes into contact with the elevating member is different from the direction in which the raising restricting member comes into contact with the elevating member. The regulating member and the raising regulating member can each suppress the rattling of the lifting member in different directions. As a result, the posture of the elevating member can be effectively stabilized.

  The gaming machine C10 includes a driving unit, a pinion that is rotationally driven by the driving unit, and a rack that meshes with the pinion, the rack is disposed on the elevating member, and the lowering restricting member includes: A gaming machine C11 which is brought into contact with the elevating member from a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack.

  According to the gaming machine C11, the rotational motion of the pinion that is rotationally driven by the driving means is converted into the linear motion of the rack, and the lifting member is lifted and lowered along the guide member by the linear motion. In this case, the rack (elevating member) can be displaced in a direction parallel to the tooth surface with respect to the pinion, and the lowering restricting member is brought into contact with the elevating member from a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack. Therefore, it is possible to restrict the rack (elevating member) from being displaced in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack with respect to the pinion.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C11, in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the ascent regulating member and the support member can contact the displacement member from one side and the other side across the guide member A gaming machine C12, which is disposed respectively.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C1 to C11, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the one side and the other side where the rising restricting member and the supporting member sandwich the guide member Since the guide member is disposed so as to be able to come into contact with the displacement member, rattling in either direction of the displacement member toward the one side or the other side with respect to the guide member is regulated by the rise restricting member or the support member contacting each other. it can. Therefore, it can suppress effectively that the displacement member arrange | positioned by the descent | fall position originates in a disturbance.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C12, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the support member and the rise restricting member are in contact with the displacement member while being different in position along the extending direction of the guide member. A gaming machine C13, wherein the gaming machine C13 is disposed so as to be possible and the support member is disposed above the rise restricting member.

  According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C1 to C11, the support member and the rising regulating member are positioned along the extending direction of the guide member in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position. Since the displacement member is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the displacement member, the rattling of the displacement member in the oblique direction can be restricted by contact with the ascending restriction member and the support member. Therefore, it can suppress effectively that the displacement member arrange | positioned by the descent | fall position originates in a disturbance.

  In addition, since the support member is disposed above the ascending restriction member, the support member does not hinder the elevation member, and a space for the elevation member to ascend and descend can be secured. Therefore, the degree of freedom in design can be ensured.

<About the concept of the invention taking as an example a structure in which the detection part 641 of the rotating member 640 is detected by the detection sensor 684>
In a gaming machine comprising a movable member formed to be movable and a detection means for detecting the movement position of the movable member, the detection means is arranged at unequal intervals along the direction of movement of the movable member. A gaming machine D1 comprising a plurality of detected parts provided, and a plurality of detection sensors arranged on a movement locus of the detected parts.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine including a movable member formed to be rotatable and a detecting means for detecting a rotational position of the movable member (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-46467). According to this gaming machine, the detection means includes a plurality of slits formed at equal intervals on the outer periphery of the moving member, and a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit that are arranged to face each other with the slits interposed therebetween, and the light receiving unit receives light. The number of pulses of the pulse-like signal is cumulatively added, and the amount of rotation of the moving member from the reference position (that is, the rotational position) is detected based on the cumulatively added number of pulses. However, in this case, if a detection failure such as a light reception failure of the light receiving unit occurs, a deviation occurs between the rotational position of the moving member and the cumulative addition number, and the rotational position of the moving member cannot be accurately detected. There was a problem. That is, when a detection failure occurs, it affects the subsequent detection results, and every time a detection failure occurs, the influence on the detection results is accumulated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the detection means is arranged on the moving member on the moving locus of the detected parts arranged at unequal intervals along the direction of movement of the moving member. Since a plurality of detection sensors are provided, the movement position of the moving member can be detected based on a combination of detection results of the plurality of detection sensors. In other words, the moving position of the moving member can be detected based only on the current detection result detected by the plurality of detection sensors, and the past detection result of the detection sensor is required to detect the moving position of the moving member. Therefore, the moving position of the moving member can be accurately detected.

  In the gaming machine D1, the moving member includes a plurality of divided members, and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along a moving direction. The plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on the arrangement interval of the division members. A gaming machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the moving member includes a plurality of divided members, and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along the moving direction. Are disposed on some of the plurality of divided members and not disposed on the remaining divided members, and the plurality of detection sensors are disposed on the basis of the distance between the divided members. Therefore, each time the moving member is displaced by an amount corresponding to the arrangement interval of the divided members, the combination of detection results of the plurality of detection sensors can be varied. That is, the moving position of the moving member can be detected with the moving amount corresponding to the arrangement interval of the divided members as the minimum unit.

  Note that the plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on the arrangement interval of the divided members means that the plurality of detection sensors are respectively arranged at positions corresponding to any of the plurality of divided members. Means that. That is, it means that each of the plurality of detection sensors is disposed at a position where the presence or absence of the detected portion of the corresponding divided member can be detected.

  In the gaming machine D2, the moving member includes a first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and a second interval in which the plurality of divided members are narrower than the first interval. And a plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on the arrangement interval of the dividing members in the first interval, and the movement locus of the detected part in the first interval A gaming machine D3, which is arranged above.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the moving member includes a first section in which a plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and a plurality of divided members are more than the first interval. Since the second section connected at the second interval which is a narrow interval is formed, the length of the moving member can be shortened as compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval. As a result, a space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed.

  In this case, the plurality of detection sensors are arranged on the movement locus of the detected part in the first section at intervals based on the arrangement interval (first interval) of the divided members in the first section. It is possible to easily secure a space necessary for arranging the detection sensors. In other words, when setting the arrangement interval (second interval) of the divided members in the second section, it is not necessary to consider the space for the arrangement of the detection sensor. A narrow interval can be set. As a result, the space required for disposing the moving member can also be suppressed from this point.

  In the gaming machine D3, the split member includes a main body member on which the detected member is disposed, and a link member that is connected to the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent split member so that both ends are displaceable. The link member is displaced with respect to the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent divided member, whereby the interval between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased, and the link member is displaced in the first section. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that it reaches the end, and the division member is restricted from being displaced in the direction of widening the interval between the adjacent division members.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3, the split member can be displaced at both ends of the main body member on which the detected member is disposed and the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent split member. Since the link member is displaced relative to the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent divided member, the interval between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased. And the structure for forming a 2nd area can be simplified.

  In this case, in the first section, the link member reaches the end of displacement, and the divided member is restricted from being displaced in the direction of increasing the interval between the adjacent divided members, so that the detected object in the direction of increasing the interval is detected. It is possible to suppress the position variation of the part. As a result, the detection accuracy by the detection sensor can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D4, the split member includes a base member disposed so as to be displaceable, and the base member guides the main body guide portion and the link member that guide the main body member when the split member is displaced. A link guide portion that acts on the link member when the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guide portion of the base member, so that the main body member and the adjacent member are adjacent to each other. A gaming machine D5, wherein a posture of the link member with respect to a main body member of the divided member is changed.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the base member includes a main body guide portion that guides the main body member and a link guide portion that guides the link member when the divided member is displaced, When the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guide portion of the base member, the guide portion acts on the link member and changes the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent divided member. As the posture of the link member changes, the interval between the divided members can be increased or decreased. That is, the first section and the second section can be formed by increasing or decreasing the interval between the divided members while moving the moving member.

  In the gaming machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by the link guide portion of the base member, and the guided portion of the link member is slidably inserted into the link guide portion of the base member. The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the groove width is set to a dimension corresponding to the outer shape of the link member.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by the link guide portion of the base member, and the link guide portion of the base member is guided by the link member. Since the portion is formed in a groove shape that is slidably inserted, and the groove width is set to a dimension corresponding to the outer shape of the link member, the link member can be easily maintained at the displacement end in the first section. Thereby, it is possible to reliably regulate the displacement of the divided member in the direction of increasing the interval between the adjacent divided members, and to suppress the position variation of the detected portion in the direction of increasing the interval. The detection accuracy by the detection sensor can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines D4 to D6, the split member includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the main body member, and abuts against the main body member of the adjacent split member in the first section. The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced to a position, and the division member is restricted from being displaced in a direction of narrowing an interval between adjacent division members.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines D4 to D6, the split member includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the main body member. Since the displacement member is displaced to a position where it comes into contact with the main body member and the division member is restricted from being displaced in the direction of narrowing the interval between the adjacent division members, the detected portion in the direction of narrowing the interval is restricted. Can be suppressed. As a result, the detection accuracy by the detection sensor can be improved.

<About the concept of the invention taking as an example a structure for adjusting the interval between the divided members DV in the moving member 640>
In a gaming machine including a movable member formed to be movable, the movable member includes a plurality of divided members and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along a moving direction. A second section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval and a second section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a second interval that is narrower than the first interval. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that a section is formed.

  Here, a gaming machine including a moving member formed to be rotatable is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-115426). In this case, for example, a plurality of pieces of identification information can be displayed along the circumferential direction on the front surface of the moving member, and the player can visually recognize the identification information arranged at a predetermined position. However, in consideration of the player's visibility, the identification information needs to have a certain size or more. Therefore, if the number of identification information displayed is increased, the moving member becomes larger in diameter and necessary for the arrangement. While the space increases, when the diameter of the moving member is reduced, the number of identification information displayed is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the moving member includes a first section in which a plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and a plurality of divided members that are narrower than the first interval. Since the 2nd section connected with the 2nd interval is formed, compared with the case where the whole is connected with the 1st interval, the length of a moving member can be shortened. As a result, a space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed. That is, the space required for the arrangement of the plurality of divided members can be suppressed while securing the number of divided members. Therefore, for example, when displaying the identification information on each divided member, it is possible to suppress the space necessary for disposing the moving member while securing the number of identification information displayed.

  In the gaming machine E1, the split member includes a main body member, and a link member connected to each of the main body portion and the main body portion of the adjacent split member so that both ends are displaceable. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by being displaced with respect to the main body portion of the adjacent divided member.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the split member includes a main body member and a link member that is connected to each of the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent split member so as to be displaceable. In order to form the first section and the second section, the link member is displaced with respect to the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent divided member so that the interval between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased. Can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine E2, the split member includes a base member disposed so as to be displaceable, and the base member guides the main body guide portion and the link member that guide the main body member when the split member is displaced. A link guide portion that acts on the link member when the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guide portion of the base member, so that the main body member and the adjacent member are adjacent to each other. A gaming machine E3, wherein a posture of the link member with respect to a main body member of the split member is changed.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the base member includes a main body guide portion that guides the main body member and a link guide portion that guides the link member when the divided member is displaced, When the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guide portion of the base member, the guide portion acts on the link member and changes the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent divided member. As the posture of the link member changes, the interval between the divided members can be increased or decreased. That is, the first section and the second section can be formed by increasing or decreasing the interval between the divided members while moving the moving member.

  In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the dividing member includes a displacing member disposed on the main body member so as to be displaceable, and the displacing member is inclined toward the adjacent dividing member in the first section. In addition, the gaming machine E4 is characterized in that in the second section, the posture is raised more than the posture in the first section.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2 or E3, the displacement member is inclined to the side of the adjacent divided member in the first section. It can be made easier. Therefore, for example, when the identification information is displayed on the displacement member, the visibility of the identification information to the player can be improved. Moreover, since the space | interval between division members is widened in a 1st area, the space for a displacement member to incline can be ensured, and the displacement member can be enlarged correspondingly. Therefore, also from this point, the visibility of the displacement member, that is, the visibility of the identification information can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the second section, the displacing member is in a standing posture rather than the posture in the first section, so that the displacing member can be separated from the main body member of the adjacent divided member, and the main body members are correspondingly separated. The distance between them can be reduced. That is, the 2nd space | interval in a 2nd area can be narrowed. As a result, the length of the moving member can be shortened, and the space necessary for disposing the moving member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is displaceably disposed on an upper surface of the main body member, and is disposed above the upper surface of the main body member of the adjacent divided member in the second section. A gaming machine E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is disposed on the upper surface of the main body member so as to be displaceable, and in the second section, the upper side of the main body member of the adjacent divided member is above Since it is disposed, interference with the displacement member can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, the main body members can be brought close to each other until they come into contact with each other, and the interval between them can be made narrower. That is, the second interval in the second section can be made narrower. As a result, the length of the moving member can be shortened, and the space necessary for disposing the moving member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine E3, the main body guide portion of the base member has a circular track formed in the gaming machine E6.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E3, the track of the main body guide portion of the base member is formed in a circular shape, so that the main body member is displaced by being guided by the main body guide portion of the base member. Can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine E3, the track of the divided member in the first section is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape connects all of the plurality of divided members in the circumferential direction at the first interval. A gaming machine E7 characterized by having a radius equivalent to that of a circular arrangement.

  Here, a first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected in the circumferential direction at a first interval, and a plurality of divided members are connected in the circumferential direction at a second interval that is narrower than the first interval. When the second section is formed on the moving member (hereinafter referred to as “the former case”), the moving member is compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval (hereinafter referred to as “the latter”). Since the length in the circumferential direction can be shortened, the space necessary for disposing the plurality of divided members can be suppressed while securing the number of divided members. However, when the tracks of the plurality of divided members are formed in a circular shape, the radius in the former case is made smaller than the radius in the latter case. Therefore, for the player who visually recognizes the divided member in the first section in the former case, the actual number as the total number of divided members forming the moving member based on the number and radius of the divided members in the first section. Recall fewer numbers.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E3, the track of the divided member in the first section is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape is such that all of the divided members are all Since the radius is equal to that of the circular connection by connecting in the circumferential direction at the first interval, the number of divided members is ensured and the space necessary for arranging the divided members is suppressed. However, the player can be reminded of the number corresponding to the actual number as the total number of divided members forming the moving member.

<Concept of Invention with Drive Mechanism 630 as an Example>
A base member in which the guide portion is extended, a moving member formed by connecting a plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member, and a driving force is applied to the moving member. Drive means, and the guide portion of the base member acts on the divided member, whereby a first guide portion that sets the interval between the divided members to a first interval, and more than the first interval A second guide portion that sets the interval between the divided members at a narrow second interval, and the driving means includes a rotary drive member having an engaging portion that can be engaged with the divided member, and the rotational drive thereof. The gaming machine F1, wherein the plurality of divided members are displaced along the guide portions of the base member by rotating the members while engaging the engaging portions with the divided members.

  Here, a gaming machine including a moving member formed to be rotatable is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-115426). In this case, for example, a plurality of pieces of identification information can be displayed along the circumferential direction on the front surface of the moving member, and the player can visually recognize the identification information arranged at a predetermined position. However, in consideration of the player's visibility, the identification information needs to have a certain size or more. Therefore, if the number of identification information displayed is increased, the moving member becomes larger in diameter and necessary for the arrangement. While the space increases, when the diameter of the moving member is reduced, the number of identification information displayed is reduced.

  Therefore, the applicant of the present application forms a moving member by connecting a plurality of divided members, and a section where the divided members are connected to the moving member at a first interval, and is narrower than the first interval. By forming a section in which a plurality of divided members are connected at a second interval, the number of divided members is ensured as compared with the case where the whole is connected at a first interval, while the plurality of divided members are secured. Space required for disposing the divided members can be suppressed, that is, when displaying the identification information on each divided member, the space necessary for disposing the moving member can be suppressed while ensuring the number of identification information displayed. I came up with it.

  However, a plurality of divided members are connected to a moving member to which a plurality of divided members are connected, at a section where the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and at a second interval that is narrower than the first interval. There is a problem that it is difficult to displace the moving member with respect to the base member while forming the section to be formed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine F1, the guide portion of the base member acts on the divided member, and thereby the first guide portion that sets the interval between the divided members to the first interval is narrower than the first interval. A second guide portion that sets the interval between the divided members at the second interval, and the drive means includes a rotation drive member having an engagement portion that can be engaged with the division member, and the rotation drive member is engaged. Since the plurality of divided members are displaced along the guide portion of the base member by rotating while engaging the portion with the divided member, the interval between the divided members is wide and the narrow interval (the first interval) The moving member can be displaced with respect to the base member while forming the section and the second interval section on the moving member.

  In the gaming machine F1, the gaming machine F2, wherein the rotation drive member is formed with a plurality of the engaging portions.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F1, a plurality of engaging portions are formed on the rotation driving member, so that the transmission efficiency of the driving force from the rotation driving member to the moving member is improved. Can do.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the plurality of divided members are connected endlessly in the circumferential direction to form the moving member, and the driving means includes two rotation driving members, and the two rotations The gaming machine F3, wherein the driving member is disposed at different positions along the circumferential direction of the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the two rotation driving members are disposed at different positions along the circumferential direction of the moving member, so that the rotation driving member is applied to the moving member. Can be distributed at different positions in the circumferential direction of the moving member. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the moving member by suppressing the application of the driving force to a part of the plurality of divided members.

  In the gaming machine F3, the tracks of the plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member have a circular shape, and the second rotary drive member has a phase difference of 180 degrees in the circular track. A gaming machine F4, which is arranged at a different position.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, the trajectories of the plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member are circular, and the two rotary drive members are circular trajectories. , The driving force from the rotation driving member can be applied to the two most distant positions of the moving member (plurality of divided members). The displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine F3 or F4, the second rotation drive member is configured such that the engagement portion of the other rotation drive member is disengaged from the engagement member of the one rotation drive member. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the engaging portions are arranged so that the phases thereof are different from each other so that the engaging members are engaged with the divided members.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3 or F4, the two rotary drive members are in contact with the other while the engaging portion of one rotary drive member is not engaged with the split member. Since the engaging portions of the rotation driving member are arranged to be different from each other so that the engaging portion of the rotation driving member is engaged with the split member, the engagement portion of one rotation driving member and the rotation driving member of the other rotation driving member are arranged. It can be avoided that the engaging portions are simultaneously disengaged from the divided members, and the transmission of the driving force from the rotary drive member to the moving member can be suppressed from being intermittent. Thereby, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

  That is, in the configuration in which a plurality of divided members are connected endlessly as in the present invention, if the transmission of the driving force from the rotational driving member to the moving member becomes intermittent, the dividing is accompanied by the transmission and release of the driving force. Since the interval between the members is increased or decreased, the posture of the moving member as a whole becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F5, either one of the engaging portion of the one rotational driving member and the engaging portion of the other rotational driving member is always engaged with the divided member, and the driving force is always applied to the moving member. Can be formed, so that the interval between the divided members can be easily kept constant. As a result, even if the moving member is formed by connecting a plurality of divided members in an endless manner, the posture can be stabilized. That is, the displacement can be stabilized.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the plurality of divided members include engaged portions with which the engaging portions of the rotation driving unit are engaged, and the engaged portions are tracks of the plurality of divided members. A gaming machine F6, which is disposed on the outer peripheral side.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the plurality of divided members include an engaged portion to which the engaging portion of the rotation driving means is engaged, Since the portion is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the track of the plurality of divided members, the amount of rotation of the moving member (the plurality of divided members) relative to the amount of rotation of the rotation drive member can be reduced. That is, since the reduction ratio can be reduced, the drive torque applied from the rotary drive member to the moving member can be increased accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the rotation driving member is disposed at a position where the engagement portion can be engaged with the divided member guided along the first guide portion of the guide portions. A gaming machine F7 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the rotation drive member is a divided member guided along the first guide portion of the guide portions, that is, between the divided members. Since the engaging portion is disposed at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged with the divided member guided in a state where the interval is widened, interference between the adjacent divided member and the rotation driving member can be suppressed, and accordingly, the rotation driving member. The diameter of can be increased. As a result, the driving torque applied from the rotary drive member to the moving member can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines F3 to F7, the guide portion of the base member acts on the split member displaced along the guide portion, thereby changing the interval between the split members to the first interval or the second interval. A third guide portion that transitions from the interval to the second interval or the first interval, and the rotation driving member is guided to the divided member guided along the third guide portion of the guide portions. A gaming machine F8, wherein the engaging portion is disposed at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in the gaming machine according to any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the rotation driving member is a divided member guided along the third guide portion of the guide portions, that is, adjacent divided portions. Since the engagement portion is disposed at a position where the engagement portion can be engaged with the divided member whose interval with the member is changed from the first interval or the second interval to the second interval or the first interval, the guide portion The split member that receives a relatively large reaction force from the (third guide portion) can be directly driven by the rotary drive member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the bending of the moving member formed by connecting the plurality of divided members in the middle, and to stabilize the displacement of the moving member.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the split member includes a main body member that is displaced along the guide portion, one end of the main body member that is rotatably connected to the main body member, and another main body member of the adjacent split member. A link member whose ends are slidably coupled, and one end and the other end of the link member are respectively rotated and slid with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent divided member, The interval between the adjacent divided members is increased or decreased, and the engaging portion of the rotation driving member is a main body member of the divided member, and the other end of the link member of the adjacent divided member is slidably connected to the part. The game machine F9 is characterized in that one end of the link member is engaged at a position close to a portion where the one end of the link member is rotatably connected.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the split member is connected to the main body member displaced along the guide portion, and one end of the main body member is rotatably connected to the main body member. A link member whose other end is slidably connected to the main body member of the adjacent divided member, and one end and the other end of the link member are rotated and slid with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent divided member, respectively. Thus, the interval between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased, and the engaging portion of the rotation drive member is the main body member of the divided member, and the other end of the link member of the adjacent divided member is slidably connected. Since the one end of the link member is engaged at a position closer to the portion where the link member is rotatably connected than the portion to be rotated, the main body member of the split member is driven by the rotation driving member and is displaced along the guide portion. When that can be easily transmitted through the body member to the link member of divided member adjacent the displacement of the body member. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the displacement of the moving member.

  In the gaming machine F4 or F5, the gaming machine F10 is provided with driving gears arranged concentrically with a circle that is a track of the plurality of divided members and respectively meshed with the two rotary driving members.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F4 or F5, since the driving gears meshed with the two rotational driving members are provided, the two rotational driving members are synchronized by rotating the driving gears. It can be rotated in the state where it is done. As a result, the rotation of the moving member can be stabilized. In this case, since the drive gear is disposed concentrically with the circular shape that is the track of the plurality of divided members, the drive gear and the two rotational drive members are movable members (a plurality of divided members) in the front view of the base member. It can arrange | position inward rather than the outer periphery of this movement locus. That is, the drive gear and the rotary drive member 2 are not protruded outward from the outer shape of the moving member, so that the size can be reduced accordingly.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B11, C1 to C13, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B11, C1 to C13, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, and F1 to F10, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B11, C1 to C13, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Characteristic gaming machine K3. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
<Means>
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 includes a movable member formed to be movable, and a detection unit that detects a movement position of the movable member, and the detection unit moves the movement member to the movement member. And a plurality of detection sensors arranged on the movement trajectory of the detected parts.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, wherein the moving member includes a plurality of divided members and the divided members are connected along the moving direction. The detected portion is disposed on a part of the plurality of divided members and is not disposed on the remaining divided members, and the plurality of detection sensors are arranged on the divided members. They are arranged at intervals based on the installation interval.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, wherein the moving member includes a first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and the plurality of divided members. Are formed at a second interval that is narrower than the first interval, and the plurality of detection sensors are based on an arrangement interval of the dividing members in the first interval. Are arranged on the movement locus of the detected portion in the first section.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to accurately detect the moving position of the moving member.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the moving position of the moving member is detected with the moving amount corresponding to the arrangement interval of the divided members as a minimum unit. be able to.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, it is possible to suppress a space necessary for arranging the moving member.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 Game board 330 Elevator (displacement member)
341 Drive motor (drive means)
351 1st gear (1st gear, part of transmission member)
351b Contact portion 352 Second gear (second gear, part of transmission member)
354b Receiving portion 354c Adjacent gear teeth (predetermined teeth)
413 Locking part (supporting member)
415 Lowering restriction member 417 Lifting restriction member 417c Release convex part (release action part)
417g Torsion spring (biasing means)
420 Drive side slide member (part of lifting member)
422 Second passage forming member (second passage member, action member)
422b Shaft support (rotating shaft)
422f accommodation recess (part of the working member)
424 Connection member 424a Tubular part (rotating shaft)
424b Upper side wall (one side wall)
424c Lower side wall (other side wall)
430, 3430 Drive side slide member (displacement member)
434a Engagement surface (engagement part)
434b Separation action surface (separation action part)
441 Drive motor (drive means)
442 Drive gear (pinion)
451 Guide rod (guide member)
452 Rack (part of lifting member)
453 Contact wall (part of the lifting member)
510, 2510 Base member (part of case body)
512 shaft support hole (rotating shaft)
515, 2515 Downflow passage (downstream passage)
520, 2520 First passage forming member (first passage member)
521, 521 Sorting base member (sorting member)
521c Shaft support (rotating shaft)
521e Distributing convex part (wall part)
550 Cover member (part of case body)
552 Introduction cylinder (upstream passage)
2560 Tip wall member (ball feeding regulating means, cover body)
2562 Torsion spring (biasing member)
620 Guide member (base member, main body guide part)
621 Connection link working groove (link guide, guide)
621a Large diameter part (first guide part)
621b Small diameter part (second guide part)
621c Connection part (third guide part)
630 Drive mechanism (drive means)
634 Central transmission member (drive gear)
637 One side rotation drive member (rotation drive member)
637b Engagement part 638 Other side rotation drive member (rotation drive member)
638b engaging portion 640 rotating member (moving member)
DV split member 641 engaged portion 641c detected portion (detecting means)
642 Rear side main body (main body member)
643 Front side main body (main body member)
644 Linking link member (link member)
644a insertion part (guided part)
646 Display board (displacement member)
684 Detection sensor (detection means)
S1 1st section S2 2nd section

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine comprising a movable member formed so as to be movable, and a detection means for detecting the movement position of the movable member,
The detection means includes a plurality of detected portions at least partially disposed on the moving member along the direction of movement, and a plurality of detected portions disposed on a movement locus of the detected portions. A detection sensor,
The moving member includes a plurality of divided members and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along the moving direction.
The detected portion is disposed on a part of the plurality of divided members and is not disposed on the remaining divided members, and the plurality of detection sensors are disposed at intervals of the divided members. A gaming machine characterized by being arranged at intervals with reference to. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising light emitting means.

Images